RU SSIAN GRAMMAR
FO R C LASS AN D R E FE R E N C E U SE
A Progressive Method of Learning Russian
E JO HN DYN LE Y PRIN CE , Ph. D.
Professor of
4883 89
N EWYORK
Columbia U niversity Press I 9I 9
RI HT ES E RV D ALI. G S R E HT I 9| 9 COPYRIG . N IVERSITY PRESS By COLU MBIA U
ublished N ovemba . l 9l 9. Set up md electroty ped . P I N TR O D U CTIO N
T l v n ic a R he living S a o l nguag es are u ssian , Polish ,
- a - an d Czech o Slov k , Serbo Croatian , Slovene , Wendish Bulg
a an arian , all so closely related th t a knowledg e of y one of m them is a key to an easy co prehension of all the others .
f Th e R u ssian languag e i s di ficult and at first sig ht ,
a a a irregular , and yet m ny obst cles dis ppear when the student
an a becomes familiar with the phonetics d the g r mmatical basis .
R u ssian is hard to acqu ire at first , mainly owing to the
somewhat confu sing phonetics ; viz . , the unlikeness of many sound s to those of E ng lish and the chang es in spelling
m m . of numerou s for s , when certain sounds are co bined Added to this is the fact that the accent d oe s not fall reg ularly on any one syllable , bu t moves in the inflected
am forms of the s e word so arbitrarily , that the stress of each form mu st be learned rather by association than by mm memorizing . In the p resent gra ar , the compiler has tried to le ad the learner more briefly than has been done in some other grammars of R u ssian , by progressive step s through the mazes of R u ssian morphology . M ost of the examples given are intended for reference and not to be learned by heart at the outset . No attempt has been made to expound
' the higher style , poetical metre , etc . , as these can be learned only after the beginner is well equipped g rammatically . It is \ a h i absolutely necessary to tr in students first in t e acc d en ce, m teaching the to recognize and u se , both by sight and sound . the inflection s and conjugations . This has been attempted in the present work by means of exercises in R u ssi an at the close of each lesson . These themes should be transl ated in to E nglish and then re- tran slated into R u ssian without reference to the origin al text . I t is quite impossible to learn H ” R u ssian by the natu ral method ; that is , exclu sively by
a t lking , withou t a previou s study of the grammar in all its essential s .
Th e writer acknowledges his debt to the grammars of
’ n fi I va o , Paul Fu chs and Nevill Forbes . as well as to Meyer s R u s s i s c h e r S p r ach fii h r e r for some valuable suggestions .
ffi Owing to war condition s , it was di cult to find a fon t
of type satisfactory for beginners and the compiler i s aw are
of the deficiencies of some of the lettering herein u sed , H i s warmest thanks are due to M essrs . V . V . Kister and Clarence
A . Manning for their assistance in reading the p roof of the
an k v i h exercises , and to M r . Bozo R o c for his patien t labor u nder many di fficulties in p rinting the work . PAGE
Th e R u ssian Alphabet 1
Th e Noun . Masculine Nouns 6
Masculine Noun s (contin ued) 1 4 Feminine Noun s 1 9 Soft Feminine Nouns 2 5 Neu ter Nouns 29
Th e Adj ective . Attributives 3 5
Th e Predicate Adj ective 45 Comparison of Adj ectives 50
Th e Pronoun . Personal Pronoun s 6 0 Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronou ns 6 7 R elative Pronoun s 7 2 Defi nite and Indefinite Pronoun s 7 7
Th e Nume rals . Cardinals 88
Declen sion of Numerals . Cardinal s 93 Ordinals 1 01
Numerals (continued) : Idiomatic Con structions 1 07
Numerals (continued): Fractions Distri bu ti ves , ,
M ultiplicatives , Collectives 1 1 4
Th e Adverb 1 22 T Th e Verb . enses and Morphology 1 3 6 m Th e I perative . Gerunds an d Participles 1 45 Variant Verbs 1 52
Irregular Verbs 1 7 5
Th e Verbal Aspects and Passive 1 86
Th e Preposition s 200
Syntax 203
LE SSON 1
THE RU SSIAN ALPHABET
a as in father; when u naccen m ted , short e as in et .
b as in English .
v as in English ; sometimes f ,
when final .
hard g as in get ; E ng . v in
genitive of adjectives , as
r - no opa o do b ravo, not go.
d , bu t when final , sometimes t . Do not confu se with J: (1 3)
always yay , when accented ; un
accented yii , bu t 5 (with diae resis) yo (cf
z 7. as in a u re; repre sented by
zh French j .
z as in zeb ra .
cc when u naccenterl i in pin ; frequen tly palatalized yee
or yi .
1 0) I same as u ; u sed only when the cc sound precedes anothe r ' i ia xxa vowel , as d , never (bu ' a J ma ex cept in N ip‘b (world) , A L P H A B E T l l ) l7l n us ed only in diphthongs or tri ph Be 8 as ' an i on thongs , as ; oy ; kra tkoy .
en yay ; na oy .
E ng . k . Kah
! ve ry thick I ; almost ull , bu t Ell when followed by the soft sign soft like the Ger
man I . Do not confu se with A G)
Eng . m. E mm
E ng . n . Enn
almost like 0 in not e; when un O
accented a in far.
Eng . p . Pay
r trilled r; neve guttu ral , as in E rr
German .
Eng . 5 , as in soft; neve r 2 . E 5 5
n E g . t . Tay
r oo in hoot , neve 00 in foot . 0 0
Eng . f . Eff
rm the soft Ge an guttu ral ch , Khah
rep resented by kh .
Eng . ts . Tsay
as in r . ch , chu ch Chay
sh in shall . Shah
’ sh eh p ronounced as one sound Sh ebah
- as in cash check .
the hard sign , final in all words Yer which do not end in a vowel or in the soft sign not
p ronounced . A L P H A B E T ft
9 bf 14 = i or Yero 6 2 ) when accented German o, y 6 French eui in feuille : when
u naccented , almost i in pin ,
bu t more unclear .
the soft sign , which has the value of a faint consonantal
y afte r preceding consonant;
r r i it ep esented by i , as y.
pronounced exactly like e
when unaccented yu ; with
d r iae esis I; has the value yo , like 3
e in met; this is the only un
palatalized e in Ru ssian .
Eng . yoo .
has the valu e yah , when accen
: n ted when u accented ye ,
y u .
Eng . f . ( rare); occu rs chiefly in Feetah
theological words .
i as in pin ( rare); occu rs in
theological words .
All the Ru ssian vowels are su sceptible of change when
. The d u naccented accent is indicate with every word through out this g ramma r. I t I I AL ]B El fr 4.
E x ercise in Pt on u n cia tion
34 25 9 28 s 34 23 30
- sr - T a X O - L H si rr y gi n A H T . ' ' ' ' - - t a h - r Ny a h nyah oo chit dee y kho dy ee tj .
Th e nu rse teaches the child to w alk .
7 l 1 5 27 28 1 3 26 30 I 9 ,
' - - - o rs c e H m n H a T a M s . JI m a ;r r o
r n - h h - n ah hm a Z h e n s c ee ta . Lo sh dy sta
Th e Th e woman is there . horse is
28 34 . - m a - ;r n c r o ' ' '
- - ce t tahm . d s a a h t tahm (y) Lo sha y ee t y .
Th e standing there . horses are standing there .
3 5 I B I 7 2
- - o - - B e gi p o n y c T 0 . C d a n a ' ' ' - a- - Vy e dro poo s to . S ba h kah
Th e Th e pail (is) empty . dog
i s e 9 23 1 3 1 7 27 ' - ' - ' r a. H 3. s a u n i t s Jr a n x A u g a s . I II e
' ' ' ' — n ikh - dy ee t nah za d la h pakh . Sh ch e
on its hind legs . Th e gener
29 25 3 h ' n p u n ‘l e - l l O - B B K 'L A a n s m n s u n ' d ri che - lo vy ek d ahl mny e mee
person gave to me chari ty
29 33 I 7 24
- - l l T H I O H - - - o c H . T H n a H a A e p e B s '
- - . P t ee a - - los tin yoo ts h nah dye rye vy e .
( m ) . Th e th al s bird is on e tree .
22 l l 34 27 33 l l , , ' - ( - n - x a e s a n - x - D y (b a m s . lo p i n
- - - - - Foo fy kah v yah shehee kye . Y oo ree
box Th e j ersey (sweater) is in the . George i s A L P H A B E T 5
' ' B 's M i - p rs M H o - r o p a 3
V mee- rye mn o- g o raz
I n the world there are many different
3 22 I O
- - ( - - r 3 H K O a s . D i a n K a t p a ' ye- zi - kof Fee- a l - kah krah
langu ages . Th e violet
c n B a .
'
- see vah .
beau tifu l .
Th e student may refer numbers alphabet as indicated above .
Ex ercise 1
' ' ' ' ' ’ ' ' ' - n rsr x o n r rs . Xfe fl n u a Ta H sr rrsr y m r s g gr m m . JI o manb ' ' ' ' ' ' ’ ' ma cr osr T b TaM L . Be o n c ro cr on r r, r am s . JI o gm np y
' ' ' ' ' a n n x ' a n ax ' I e r ‘ ’ Co6 a rca cmmu H a 3 g s Jr s . H np m I eJI O BBK b ' ' ' '
' cr rm ro . H r n a H a e eBs . (D nan . MK B Mn no n gr p y iba n x a B b
' ' ' ’ ’
IO i n a ses . Br. Mi b MHo r o a sn b i x r. a sax sr mrrms. p ri p p o es .
' ' (Dia irx a x pacn iaa.
Learn the following vocabulary and translate the above
ex ercise u sing the R u ssian handwriting , both in this and the ,
following ex ercises .
' x in sa gmn r, hinder , rear ; '
. aa u in . pail prep . plu ral of adj g B I C B here prepositional AT ’ case of Ae peBo Ky pmxa hen
' tree; see L es . l I . Jra rra leg , paw of animal
' ' ’ b no ma n an st child J o man : pl . n
' ate m nmra woman horse , horses N O U N S
alms there
world he teache s
to me violet on j ersey
nu rse to wal k , go he g ave person pen generou s
bird this ( neut . )
empty (neu t . ) of languag es
'
different ; pl . ( ass i n ) ' 0 of pa ams m . 3 l m “ . case of prep he sits 51 man box ; dog drawer
LE SSON l l
O F HE FIR T LE N T AN ALYSIS T S SSO . HE N OU N
I . It will be observed from the firs t lesson that the
S masculine noun may end in the hard ign , or mu te 4 ,
' ' ' x e . as sr mn rt s (bo ); x x os s n . (person) , words already given
N o u n s e n d i n g i n t h e m u t e a r e a l w a y s m a s c u l i n e . There i s also a certain number of masculine noun s which
'
- 5 x o a 6 , may end in the soft sign , as p m (ship), which de
am s cline the s e as the hard masculines , save that the soft ma
- cu lin es insert the consonantal y sound before the ending . Th e ' - m . u n sm adj ectival asc ending is either , as me irp (generou s) , ' - n n or on , as ycr o (empty) .
We h ave also had in the first lesson three feminine
' ' - a si n g noun s ending in : co6 a xa (dog); (pia u a (violet) , and u
. Th e m \ nu rse) two first are called hard fe inines , and the latter ,
' sr - ~ l n sr rr , i s a soft feminine . Nouns ending in a, sr are a w a y s m m i m Th g r a a t c a l l y f e i n i n e (Lesson IV , e N O U N S
' w x o ma b m ord jr (horse) , ending in the soft sig n i s also fe inine ,
- and i s declined in a different way from the a feminines . I t i 3 t h u s e v i d e n t t h a t n o u n s i n 4 : m a y b e e i t h e r m a s c u l i n e o r f e m i n i n e a n d t h e g e n d e r o f t h e s e n o u n s c a n n o t be
1 r n Th e a e d b y r u I e , bu t only by practice . e adj ective ' m rt a n Ba a for p c (beautiful) , given above , i s al so feminine , in ' reemen t ( s g with its noun bia Jma (violet) . A will be shown below , ' - - - fem . sr the adj ectival ending i s either a, asr, or a .
'
- . Th e o Be o . 2 neuter noun ends u sually in , as np (pail)
- These o noun s are always neuter . Th e adj ectiv al neuter end
' ' ' ' - t - ing is also 0 , ny c o (empty) , bu t sometimes n y cr o e, as will appear later .
THE N OUN
3 . Ru ssian has six cases ; v iz. , nominative , genitive ,
dative , accu sative , instrumental and prepositional , with a few
vocatives in relig iou s words . Th e chief meanings of these cases are indicated in the following paradigms .
’ Th e R u ssian names of the cases are n u en n r enb m m (no ’ ’ m ' min ati ve); pogn r ex s r mn (genitive); ga r ems rmn (dative); ma a ' r eJrrs ms m (accu sative); TBopn Tems rmn (instrumental); u pen
' o m m x xt (prepositional); ( cf. , however ,
Th - 4. e common ending of the prepositional case i s s,
' ' as we have seen in the words B’b sr mmr- s (in the box ) ; B'b Mi pb
' ‘ ' - ' H a Jra n ax , (in the world); s (on the paws) , the latter ending ax i for noun s and - u x 's for adj ectives being the u sual prepositional
plu ral thoug h all the declensions . Th e masc . pl . gen . u sually ' - u st s i s - o er. ends in o , with hard masculines , as a (of the
a langu ges) .
T i R n . 5 . here is no article , defin te or indefinite , in u ssia
6 . We have also al ready learn ed something of the verb ;
and viz . , that the third person , both singular plu ral , of the pre 3 M A S C U L I N E N O U N S
' ' w cr oa r s ' sent tense ends in i s , as (he is standing); cr osr r s (they
' ' a are standing ); CH H T S (he i s sitting) . This n ending in a mute A , , mu st not be confu sed with the ar e in which th e infinitive u su
' '
rs ally ends , as x onn T (to go) , the third person of which is x o
n ji n (he goes) . This will impress u pon the student the im
portance of distinguishing between the hard and the soft sign s .
conn ection th e m am. Finally , in this , for gr (he gave) g ives u s the ' T key to the past tense , which u su ally ends in hu s x og n m.
(h e was going) .
THE MASCU LfN E NOU N
7 . Th e student will now learn the declen sions of the h ard and soft masculines which follow and apply them in the second ex ercise .
- ' H ard masculines are those ending in r. (the mute) while
- en d n . the soft masculines in b , or
HARD MASCU LINES SINGULAR I n an imate Animate
l 51 mam, box o¢n n€p $ I ' 51 Imin t— a of a b ox odmne p - a 51 max - y to a box O dmreD- y ' sr mn x 's box odmne p - a ' ’ ' n mn rto- M s by mean s orbn ne p - om . of a box ' ' - or r e - sr mrrx a in , on etc . b r p s a box PLURAL
' ' a mn x - n box es odmrre p b l ' ' sr mn rt - om. of boxes orbn rre p - om. ' '
- sr mn rt - am . to box es odmne p am . ' ' x mn rt - n boxes odmne p - om. ' ' n mn x - amn by means odmne p - au n of boxes ' ' - x ' mr e - ax ' sr mn x a r. in , on od r p s
etc . boxes M A S C U L I N E N O U N S 9
H ere we observe a subdivision into inan imate and animate which ru ns through all masculine nouns . Th e difference is in the m accu s . singular and plu ral of ani ates , which accu sative c ase
S mu st be the same as the gen . ing . and pl . respectively . In i n an im s m m ate , the accu sative is the sa e as the no inative in both the singular and plu ral . Note that the regular plu ral n - all m om . ending i s u for hard asculines , except those which
a m end in K, r , x , and the sibilants are, , , m, which ' '
- - - ' sr mt n sr rs require the n om . pl . in n , as m and not mn x i ; H O JK L
m . . H o m. . fe (knife); x Cf Lesson IV on the gen singular .
- ' 0 . O MB 8. Note also that of the instr and of the g en .
- t om, m 3x r m pl . , beco es e after noun s ending in , , , m, n, as ' ' ' ' - ’ sr m . . Ms csrr eM s O M b . Ms c r , . n ( onth); instr sing r , not ; gen pl Ms csr
s - B' me s , and not 0 B.
- . H m sacs as ms s 9 ard asculines ending in , , , m , take en , '
’ 0 131 . . TO Ba H I instead of in the gen plu ral , as p H I: (companion) ; ' '
en T e n n . . g . pl . o a p me , H ones (knife); gen pl H ome n .
I O SOFT MASCU LINES
A . ENDING I N SINGULAR Inanimate
' Kopa onb ' sr G . R opaon '
D . x opaomo ' Kopa Ge
rto ao e I . p n m . ' K ao P . op ms
tsars 1 0 M A S C U L I N E N O U N S
- n B . E NDING I N
' ' ' capa n shed I O pi n Georg e r epo n hero
' ' ' capa sr IO pisr r epo sr
' ' ' capa ro IO piro r epo ro
' ' ’ capa n IO pi sr repo n
' ' ' capa em . IO piebn . r epo erm. ' ' ' capa s l opis r epo s
PLURAL
' ' capa n sheds repo rr heroes ' ' capa em. r epo er n ' ' capa m -s r epo s m's ' ' capa n r epo en's ' ' capa snun repo srmr ' ' capa a x s repo srx 's
DI rN - en C . EN NG
Singular Plu ral
o ' ne n i l cox onrs n a N . cox o night nga e nighting les 0 b a cox os s é ns G . conoa ' '
rs conoab x u s D . conon ro 0
A . CO I O Bb fl cox onb EBt
' BB C coaonb x I . CO J O M$ mr '
P . CO J O BBB cox onrs sr x s
- l l . Th e inanimates of th e n class only diffe r from the
m th e om animates in that the accu sative is the sa e as n inative , ' tre n both in the singular and plu ral , as py (brook); acc . sing ' l m pyqe n (not acc . p . , the sa e as the nominative pyu m
(and not
I N N U N 1 2 M A S C U L E O S
Voca bul ary
' ' O t m e r, ofii er aH rJri n cx i n E nglish (adj . ) b r p c '
' ox o r rrmu . r Bor r. God hunte ' Imo r u m a r 6mm. he was c rpente '
l n im . Balm. to you (p . ) nona hand over ( p ' ' ' ' n o an r e . n s nags ror s they master (in st . ) g , pl of noga
B AT) ( n . ) Bari um, he saw ; saw O under i str ' ' v n ox m m, Bn acy I see y got ; received ' ' n oco x 's am Bopooe n sparrow bassador ' n n Bo mm Bcs all people p A p cou rtier (adj .
' ' noun) o grrrr's enters “ pm a ” f riend . ) B1 . in (with into (instr f paoo r rrx n workman TA! where ' ' paoo xi n workman (adj . r O BO Io I speak p noun) ”m g “ ' ? capa n shed , l ' A3 3 Te gi ve (p . ) 3 cits x arro done (neut . ) 0 “ a at home ' “ (y) ceosr by himself , ' AO MO R homeward cxax n r e tell (imper . pl . ) ' x n s n they h vc ’ y cxasa m they s aid ; told and ' cox os e n nightingale a ep a r op's emperor cr on . table ' HH K CH C pr. engi nee r ' cr ox sr pr. joine r ' m K M!“ every ' Teos to thee i as Iran l ke , thou x apm m, pocket a m m, bread x or ' g hen ' ' a w x o xn r s he goes ' s km n n ? ' opo x o srr s ' gr they go x or o pu n wh i ch (masc . ) i ' xopo m1 . s good (masc . ) menas g b bear n o that (conj . ) M HB to me Y belong ing to; at (g en ) H am. over (instr)
a rs 0 abou t (prep . ) n p king ; tsar '
' oos abou t (before vowels) a r o this (neut . )
o rna T b g ive over a I ' on from (gen ) a mun box ; d rawer M A S C U L I N E N O U N S 1 3
Ex ercise 2
' ' ' ' B I B 5I r os opro o aenos s msmor o p b m gram. MH s MB JI O CT IO ' ' ' ' ' ' ' [I o a B q I O Bs I t H e Bcs Bnans ro n . aH rJI i B cc M r. B SBIBO M B. n y
' ' ' ' ' ' ' Mi r. H O B Be o s acr. Br. o Ms . SI r os o ro MS . Beg po . irp m B p o AO p A
’ ’ ' ' ‘ ' H a m SI r s ro r. B s . I . Bo r oma . Bor r. m. Mi po s . o op o p o Bo r m ’ ' ' ' ’ ' ’ ‘ ' ? ‘ H B I . n e o H Br. Ka ma rrs I E JI O BB ICa AR T ? JI BT B s AO MB. m p epo p y , ’ ' ' ' ' x T ’ s/I aB aoo T H BK m m x or o B I B TN or o prm CHAH IS go a. JI p y , p ' ' ' ’
H B rta x o o ms . P a B onyx B m. on . Ben os s x a. x 3 5 . paoo r p ' ' ' ' ' ‘ ’ b m oo r H Bm. BXO K T B E h wn r ; C B B TB xt e H BHa. Ka xc A gro , m II m g ' ' ’ ' ' ' a B e sr m I I e o B’L B mBms cr ona p oo TH Bm. Bap y c o Ao a . p , a ' ' ' ' ' '
’ ' r B T B rc H H BH e B aoo qie B r s on o B . c om. L Ito w s paoo B a. m pB p jry g ' ' ' ' ' ' ‘ JI a Br e p aoo qB MB B cx ac Te B B meH e pam . I TO B BB II BM . ' ' ' ' ' Br c ; ad o q s . 8To rm. B H meHe os s s O B B mB B Ts . o p no p , rig y m ' ' ' ' ' I I sr s r sr x 1 . B H eB e ax s . Jra o cr on pa MB . SI r o opro o c ox pa r. B 0 6 Bc p
' ' ' ' ' ’ SI BB x H BO H HX ’ o a B ar B TeJI ro x o r c Bap B DHA D L . H g o B pi . O
' ' ' ' ' ' H HKL B ruro r H B m. Ta Ms . O x o TH BBB B mro TB B x B crcaaa JI B MH B
' ' ' i ' ' Ta BT e s s rs SI BB c s b em B Bo oob és SI rro m . x o gr s m g jr . xcy ono p s . ' ' ' ' ' ' ' s I O sr d a B B e o I O iIo a B own . B b capa pi . A m o mam. p p . l l Te co ' ’
s b z m . m os x or o rm 51 m. Ban s x o , p gra .
Th e learner will translate the above exercise in writing
- and practise re tran slating his version into R u ssian . T h i s m e t h o d m u s t b e o b s e r v e d w i t h
‘ si e a c h o f t h e f o l l o w i n g e x e r c i s e s, u n g the R u ssian handwriting .
” Th e verb to be i s not u sually ex pressed in the present ' : i ' tense . Thu s M pr. H O Ab Bo rom . (the world under God
) ; B s scrs am h ere) etc the world i s u nder God n (I here I , ,
m m i am i s So eti es the auxil ary verb ( , , are) is represented
a m by a d sh , but this i s oft en o itted . M A S C U L I N E N O U N S
LE SSON lll
MASCU LIN E N OU N S ( CONTINU ED)
' - I 4. Mascu line noun s ending in aB B B s ia
fle ct regularly li ke hard masculine noun s in the sin gu lar , b u t in
' - K H ' - t the n om. pl . drop the b and add e: aB rJI B ra nBBs (English
' ' B r B'ra H e H ‘ n o man ); n om. pl . a B ; gen . pl . ABO DflH H b ( ' '
m m . s o a u e . . s o a n ble an); n o . pl A p ; gen pl n p s , etc .
N s Q u om s I S. oun in elide the o in singular , a pedg
e en x a b u - B on . (infant); gen . p o , t in the pl . they d rop Errom. and ' ' - ' e a r a . a take srt a , as p o (children); gen pl . peo n ; r eagn om. (calf) ; ' ' T r em r a Tensr n . o this class belong the n ames of all young
- rr x1 . as x oTEB om. animal s in E o , (kitten); mepefién on (foal) ; ' ' ' ' B a wen o x r. (pu ppy) has the irregular pl . meH Ta me n n , etc .
Note the irregular Baym. (grandson) which has two plu rals
' ' ' ' f ' B o Br. BH I a Ta B a i Bn B n and y q T s, belong ng to the
' - - m B ra plu ral class . It will be observed that , when a noun ste " - of this class ends in a sibilant , the plu ral ending i s a ra. as
' ‘ BH y I a Ta.
m n s I 6 . Some asculine nou in 4 take the nominative l plu ral i n - a as
' ' oe p em shore ; pl . 6 epera meadow
6 0 1m. side island ' ' Be qep r. evenin sail ' ' ro Jroc r. oice v m ' cook ( ale) ro pom. town ; city ' professor no xr opr. doctor cella r no rm. hou se ’ r x o noxom. bell police inspec to ' KO HAy KT O D’b conductor sleeve
’ ' xy aep r. coachman snow
JI EC 'B forest sort M A S C U L I N E N O U N S 1 5
n I 7 . Th e following noun s have special ending s for the om . l and g en . p . :
N om. Pl .
- 6 a pu , e
0 6 0 a peI - oonra pB , e
6 pa TB B
r aasa
r ocn oAa ' Apyss a
(D . . ) aI t Pl a Ky m . godf ther x yMO BB sr ' ’ I my m . wife s brother my pB B
' 0 sr Ba x oaa B m . host x os e
m l . 1 8. Some nouns h ave a double no inative p , the first form being colloquial :
' Bo JI ocr. hair r om. year '
' x o pn y c r. body x p ro xr hook
MEAB’ honey ’
' o x u pox x. h am ' B pode ccop i . professor pom. horn crusrr. snow
m m I 9. Note , fu rther ore , that na es of commodities take
- - a the gen . in y , instead of , when denoting qu antity an d
' ' ' ' B co m. ca x a q a mx i weight , as y py (a piece of sugar); a t a ro (a
a mEJI m. cu s. cu p of te ) . Su ch are also (silk); p (cheese); 4mm . ' ' (smoke) ; r os a pr. (g oods) ; r aoa m. (tobacco) an d certain g enitives ' ' C in adverbial ex pressions , such as 1 . oo xy H a ooru . (from side 1 s M A S C U L I N E N O U N S
' ' to side); B sr. gromy (from home); Gear. cn o py (without dissen ' “ B B T sion); ma ry (not a step fu rther) , etc . hese mu st be learn ed by practice and reading .
a 20. In the prepositional c se , the following nouns take
'
' y in stead of s arbitrarily : BB m. (view); r om. (year); BCp X b
' 6 am. as c r. ca . a (top); (ball , dance); (forest) ; m (g rden); x pan ’ e er ' 0 ' (country , edge); 6 p r. (shore); 6 m. ( Side); mocr r. (bridge);
' ' ' ' ' mx am. q ac r. o cr os r. a (closet); (hou r); p (isl nd); y ron . [e ry ]
' ' (corner); JI y r r. (meadow) ; norm . (reg iment); Topr i . (market);
' ' cq r r. r m m e err. (account); po [p y] ( ou th) and so e oth rs .
- 1 . A number of noun s in have the gen . plu ral the same as the nominative . Many of these are of foreign ori in g ,
' ' ' ' as gpary m. (dragon); yaa m . (uhlan) ; Ty pon . (Tu rk); Dex py n ' ' ' (recruit); comra r r. ( soldier) ; r y ca p r. (hu ssar); Barrer a. (cadet) ; ' ' ' ' can o r r. r p eH agre D r. (grenadier), all foreig n ; and also (boot); ' ' ' a qyJI o rt s (stocking); pass (time Germ. M al); m m. (arshin);
Bym. (pood a weight) , etc .
Voca bu lary
’ - I I e E m an r n m a n n u s ; pl . a ng lish an
' ' a 6 aJI s ; prep . Gany b ll ; dance
' ' ' m 6 a p B i I s ; pl . 6 a pe aster ; owner
' ' r ' e er 6 e pe s ; prep . o p y ban k; shore
'
B B n . DJI S O , with o (gen ) near to
' B B (Spam ; pl . opa T brother
' B an d DO B b , before
another conson ant
' '
Bo nocs ; pl . Bo nocu
' ' r os op B JI r.
' ' r ocn o a r ocn onB H s ; pl . n
'
' r o crI B raJrr.
' ' a a n ABoa B Hs ; pl . n op e '
ad . BBB H HB (pred . j ) ' non o n M A S C U L I N E N O U N S 1 7
' ' m ROM B; pl . no a hou se " - sr mepeogn on ; pl . ra foal
SnoHs sound (of bell) ' sn a ro I know ' ' BH cr pyme H m. instrumen t ' '
’ I co x ox on s ; pl . Iconorcona bell (larg e bell) ' ' ' - a Bon gy m op s ; pl . condu ctor ' ' c nyeo u ; gen . xy xa piece ' sr merr me (acc . )
'
’ M c h ; prep . Jrscy forest
'
MH o r o (takes gen . ) many ; mu ch
' c mocn ; prep . Mo Ty b ridge
M O H my (masc . ) we
B e not
H O bu t
'
B emH o r o (takes gen . ) few ; a little
' ' ' - o rcopox s ; pl . a h am ’ ' ' - n a py c s ; pl . a s ail ' n on an r e go (imper . ) ' BpBH ecB Te bring ; fetch ' ' B o e c - a p m cops ; pl . professor
' pass ; gen . pl . p as r. time (in counting)
r pom ; prep . p y mouth ' ' - ca x ap s ; gen . y sugar ' ' cBAB T r. they Sit ’ ' cm mBM r. we hear
cu p s cheese
SB o h C I I ay cr o - poms ; pl . a w atchman
m en I I fro (g . )
' - Taoa K L en . a , g y tob cco
n I e en x ' - sr Ta T n o s ; pl . calf
' '
Ty ports ; gen . pl . r y pom. Tu rk 1 8 M A S C U L I N E N O U N S
' ' ' y rox s; prep . y rxy
' yJI a rI 's
' ' y H B Bep cBr e r r.
' ' B x osB B B s ; pl . x os eBa
' q n r a ; gen . qa o
s t d — To m means ; g en . ém y
E x ercise 3
' ' ' ' ' ow . an rx n a m . TaM s . ff roBo ro s o B B ax s s o B Be fl p o A p . A p ' ' ' ' ’ '
6 . 6 a B II a ecu . TeJI B r a x a pe y p . Ba m . c asa m : gran cs B o r ei nf
' ' ' ' ' ' ' T mb . F B on o a o r o a a scrs c r. B H C Me II TaM B B B a A n p . l p n p B . p aT ' ' ' ' ' ‘ ' BB B ' c m. xo ms x os eBs . l ocn ogra crcasa JI B : um em maw . ’ ' '
3 3 0 m. x ox oxox o m . H or ecco a B1 . B BBe cBr e rs u p b p y p . l lom . po ' ' ' ' ' ' ( e cco a DJI B srto o ' B B e cBr e T B p p r r. y B p a. Bo nocu go xr opa M B BB . ’ ' ‘ ' ' ’ I . r . H e i r ro r xr a O B x r 1 . m o opa s a an no op , n o M no op r. B ' ' ' ' ' ' ro cBBTams. a Br e Ic c a x e e én e e sr r an lI y o m. c apy m p é xy at p o s . ' ' ' ' ' ' B B mB r r ax ' lla M B B e o o cu py qa ro méx ty r ao y . C ropoata ' ' ' ' ' ' B a mocr y . H B a 6 any . SI B a 6 epery . H BB Bty n apy ca c r. ' ' ' ' ' B ' - ' oe pera. Y n eB x ro ro Bo pr y (pom ) . SI gran . IO piro ' ' ' ’ ' xy co m. cu py HO HAK TC Aou o n B B pBB ecB r e Mm ' ' ' ' ' ' ox opoxa Tam . B a y rx y B Ba acy Ty pxa. H im . Ty p orcr. u ses . ' ’ ' ' ' r ' B r s JI Bax JI ou a Ty pom. 131 . m y . MB o o pas i . o opa n . 0 6 1 . y a s .
“ ” 22 . The re is no verb to have , indicating possession , in
s R u ssian when p e r s o n s a r e r e f e r r e d t o. A
shown above , this relation is ex pressed by the preposition y ' e BrI followed by th gen . of the noun ; thu s , y 6 a p a (at the
e ' maste r th maste r has); y oap r. (at the masters the
indicat masters have) . Note the following table of possession ° ' ed with the pronoun s: y meII B (I have); y r e6 B (thou hast) ; ' ' ' ' B has y H ero (pron . n yev o ) (he has) ; y B e (pr . ny eya ) (she ); ' y an d (ny evo ) (it has); y B acr. (we have); y 8 8 0 5 (y ou have) ;
- e t y B ax r. (they have) . These forms really mean : at m ; at hee;
at h im; at h er ; at it ; at u s ; at you ; at them.
2 0 F E M I N I N E N O U N S
26 ARD EM IN INE N OU NS . H F
- A. ENDING I N A SINGULAR
Animates I n an imates
' me B mB B a woman water
' ace H mB H u
' art e I I mBH rs
' ax e H mB B y
' - ace I I mBB O B , oro ' me H mB ms
PLURAL
Animates I n an imates
' DICC H I I I H H LI
' JKC H I I I HH 'B
' QKC H HI HH aM'L
' ' QKC H U I HH I,
’ K C H HI HH E MK
I are H I I I HH aXb'
SOFT F' EMIN INE NOU NS
DI I N - B B . EN NG
SINGULAR
Animates I n an imates
nu rse melon F E M I N I N E N O U N S 1
Animates I nanimates I nu II B nu In s H H B M' A I I . AH I H H AHI H Q MH
' AM H Bx r.
H a e re , as in the case of the h rd and soft masculines , it will be noted that the only difference between classes A and B feminine is the softening y con sonant between the stem and the
S th e R ending , indicated , as j u st hown , by u ssian orthography with the soft vowels .
- - 27 . Note that feminin es in a and B which are accented on the last syllable in the n om . singular may throw the accent back , either in the n om . plu ral , in order to distinguish this case
from the gen . singular , or else in the accu s . singular and the ' ' n om . pl . as well . Note that BceH a (wife) and cecr pa (sister) and others with an e vowel in the first syllable and accented on last syllable change this e to an accented é all through the
'
' meH a . am n plu ral : ; pl Bre , me s , etc . Cases of this type are
ee exc ding ly common . They can be learned only by practice .
Ordinarily the accent remains on the stem syllable .
- x - r - x a 4 - m 28. Feminine noun s in a, a, a, are , 1 a, a, take
m - B . mo . r.r in the gen . sing and plu ral instead of (cf . Lesson II ,
om m - a - tra - ma 7 . on the masc . pl . n . Fe inines in >x , , , when preceded by a con sonant , and some even when preceded by a
m - m - - 3 B - B m vowel or se i vowel , and so e in e , , p , ake the , I I e e n - n -' ‘ g e . pl . i n e , i nstead I . or a T I a B pq e B (proverb); I I I I B b but aeMJI BCMC JI (earth); KO I I B B aa R oms em. (copeck) .
- 29 . There are many words which insert an 0 or e vowel in forming the gen . plu ral . Th e case is formed in the h ard an d 2 2 F E M I N I N E N O U N S
soft feminines by the simple stem withou t any ending , as in
' i B ' ‘ d cated above : arte mBB s; E QAB; B B BB . When , however , two con i sonants p recede the a or B vowel , the in se rt on of 0 or e i s made in order to avoid an unpleasan t clu ste r of con sonants .
' ' ' T B n . hu s , instead of BO AKb , from BO AKa (whis ky), we have o go
The u se of 0 or e is dete rmined by the presence of a hard or
0 soft consonan t in the word . If the fi rst consonant is hard , is
' ' ' '
B r m. . to be u sed , as B Jma E x x on . (fork); Bo x ta Bo iro (whisky)
- If , however , the fi rst clu ster consonan t i s soft , e is to be inserted .
' ' ' ' as cs a grs oa cBa ireor. (wedding) ; B a B Bxa B B B em. (nu rse m - aid) . If the first clu ste r consonan t is a sibilant at , a, m, m,
' ' 3 r x e (bu t not , or c) , the e mu st be u sed , as Bo m ta o m m. (cat);
' tma i - a py py tem. (handle) . If the second clu ste r consonant i s ,
' ' ' l r a xa o i s u sual y inse ted, as grocrta Iro com. (plan k); 6 6
'
- oa oon . (old woman) . This i s not the case when the secon d ' ' ' - rr err' Da clu ster consonant is B or B, as coe a co c r. (pine); na
' one n m. (sheep) . H e re an e is required , unless a guttu ral is p rese t ,
' ' ' x x BB s B x rc x rrs N as y (kitchen) , which take y om. or y o . o e can
r r appea afte a gu ttu ral in R u ssian . In many instances , the vowel of the first syllable of the word decides whether 0 or e is
is to be u sed . If a soft vowel is p resent , an e is inse rted , an d if
’ a hard vowel is p resent in the word , an 0 is u sed , as n er x a
' ' n er gm. (broom); xy m a xy rcom. (doll) .
30. No inse rtion is found when the followi ng combina
: m x I M I H m I T a tions occu r , zi p , 3 g , 3 6 , p ; 1m, J , J , 1 , J , p6 , pix, c , ' 13 x ' x ' - cr , CTE , TB, x , m, x r , x x ; thu s Bxpa B p r. (fish roe, caviar); ' ’ B ei ' epcr a B pcr r. (verst); me pTBa mepr m. (off e ring) . Note
' ' ' also B po crs oa n pocs or. (praye r petition) and cecr pa cé cr ps
é ' and cecr p r. (sister); nom. pl . cgcr pu .
Some feminine noun s in - a are masculin e in sen se as
' ' ' r a ocr a m ' c B B c p ( ayor of a community); gen . pl . cr a pocr s ; yg ' m . . c B (j udge); gen pl yAe (see ju st below) , and require asculine F E M I N I N E N O U N S 2 3
' '
o cxo n r onos a ma . See adjectives , as rop n ( yor of a city) above ,
Lesson II .
a m 32 . E special attention mu st be p id to the soft fe inines ending in - i B which decline as follows :
F E INI E E NDI I N - i x C . SOFT M N S NG
PLURAL
army
This diffe rs from the regular paradigm and mu st be learned carefully .
' - i - 3 3 . If a vowel other than precede th e B , as Cs a B ' B m - n (pole); BME (snake), the gen . pl . i s for ed by B , as cBa ;
- I . B 3 m m. In the case of words in (dou ble softs) , if they are
' ' l - e B ' B accented on the last syllable , the gen . p . i s , as cr aT B ' ' ' r ' n c B B c e B c are (wri tten treatise , article), yx ygr (j udge); other
' ' - - B wise the gen . pl . is in i n or B , as oox Ty H B oonTy HiB , or oor ryH B (chatte r box ;
s 34. A has been observed , the chief diffi culty of the femi i n ne lies in the gen . pl . Note the following irregularities?
' ' ' I K BH SI - ' KO J O O JI (bell tower); gen . pl . Ico JI oIconeB s; oa m I rB ' ' (young lady) , oa pEmI eH s . M ost of this class of feminines have
' ' - ' I. . l . e e BH B the hard ending in the gen p , but note n p grep eBe B I . ' ' '
x x B B m . K (village) and y (kitchen) , Icy x o (or y x om.) which are soft . 2 4 F E M I N I N E N O U N S
a bu t ' BB JrBa fork ' Bona water ' Bcerna always ' Bu cor a height
' r p admH B countess ' AH H SI melon ' Bce I I mBB a woman ' sau sqa TeJI BH a noticeable ' '
ero his (pron . yev o )
ecu . there is , are
plays
' ' B r pa ror r. they play
B3 1 . ou t of (gen . ) ' BapTB I I a pictu re ' KH K I ‘ a book
' E o M H aTa room ' x opo Ba cow ' x o mxa cat ' E y maro I eat ' MDB my (fem . ) '
B onn . knife ; pl . B oat B
Ex ercise 4
I I I I SI SI SI on.“ BB my cooa Icy B1 . Jrscy gram. cooa E s . I I I I I ' cs E n I O aB m o c0 6 a E s Ir n s . 131 . cany cooa o (cooa KO ) . JI i . (cooa a ) I I I I I I - Ir n B n . Br a co a a are H mB u ( B B B ) . fife B mBrm Bosna 1m co a o I I I I I o I llan run s BO A)’ (BOAH [I a ecB Te mm. 136 n BO A}! P a6 0 r I I I I I
' ' ' ' ' H B K b y x pama e r r. K0 MB ar y Icap rB B 0 B (E apr B n oro ; xapr B B asra) . I I I ‘ I I I I man . B KH K t SI B n . E B B r 8 x 0 MH aTB. K0 I m M0 a. B mu Ba my y 1 . I I I I I I ' r a er r. cr. c0 6 a E on Bozo Ro m a B r a en . cs. B p (cooa ) . p cooa F E M I N I N E N O U N S 2 5
' ' ' ' ' B acr. ecu . Bo o Ba . s scu . T aB . CrcaacB r e KaMH . y p Kopo a p y ' ' ' ' ' c oxyma B xs a B eCTB MH B BB B ry B3 1 . Bo MH am . HpB B e B Te ' ' ' ' ' ' Ba u B er maro H BB JI B B BTB J ry . SI c na x y nu I o D JI ' ' ’ ' ' '
Br a eu . cr. B B B eB cs. B B H B BO B BTB r ai B B B BI . w s. p ( ) . JI p b no ' ' ’ ' ‘ ' ' ' ' I a mB B cE as a Jr B . KTSI cro a H B TDBa B p d a B BB noss a u A n . om p ' ' ' ' ' en B s cr oxs n m a cr ms Do B B m. m , a oun . od ne pa H y . O m cupo ' ' ' ' ' ' ’ cB Jn . o B ’ x MB a o orcro a B n o x xr opa no I I O O A) o u . B b n B s . ll p p ' ' ' ' ' ' ( ecco a n B B n r B E B n c r a n x B B B b p c poc JI B rm.acB y u . ooo n . B o on o o n ' ' ' ' ’ x n x b r .B M ( o o o x en s ) san sqa r en n a. E o 6 pa u B b a p iB .
’ '
Why is the prepositional of 1 3 0 5 , m y and not asc s?
Mention a similar case .
” ' a em B T n f . o Note that is this , bu t is neuter (Les son II) .
' ” ' ” BO B AH m Note that Ay the water , bu t O so e water , when not preceded by a noun .
Bcu . is an irregular form of the irregular verb scu . (to ? eat) . What is the diff erence between son . and ecu . in ending
’ What is the diff erence in meaning between Iro xr opa and ' gon opa ?
LE SSON V
SOFT FE MIN IN E N OU N S
F I I DI I N - B D . EM N NE NOUNS EN NG
SINGULAR
horse 2 6 F E M I N I N E N O U N S
PLURAL
horses bon es
3 5 . Note that in this class of n ouns , the accu s . is the m same as the n o . in the singular , whether the nou n be an imate
or inanimate , bu t in the plu ral the animates have the same form as the gen . singular .
h m - B B B T e instru ental plu ral ending may always be , bu t ' m - I .M B I I B in so e cases this i s shortened to , as J o JI (people); ' ' ' Be H BroII B MB ; nBe pB (doors); A p .
- I . If a sibilant precede the of the nominative , instead of
- ' B B B , SI X L , for the dat . , in str . an d prep . plu ral , the end ' ' - ' x s B n . B e n B ings become aMB , a ; as e n (thing); em , e man a,
' ' ' ' Be mB , Bema MB , Bema x s .
Nearly all this class of noun s accentuate the last syllable , beginning with the gen . pl .
m 36 . Th e following two noun s revert to the origin al ste in p in all cases except the n om . and accu s . and hence are irregular
SINGULAR
mother daughter
2 3 F E M I N I N E N O U N S
'
fem . . Bor o pBB who , which ( and neut l p . )
' Ito mx a cat
' x o mairrs horse
- JI B interrogative p article I I
H . . m n n o A , gen pl one people
man . mother
I
n . M0 er0 of my (masc . a d neut
pron . mayevo milk mou se they
wag gon ; vehicle
Sh e presented ; g ave call
servant g irl
five (takes gen . pl . ) dog hay also now already
good (fem . an d neut . pl . )
that (conj . ) in order to these to these
this (prep .)
Ex ercise 5
' ' ' ' ' Xfe H mBBa na n a Bonu (BO JI Y) JI o manB Co ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ’ mrns c I t ms. Bu a JI B x o 6 a x a scr r. x o Cr B . Z a rI Te B TB x o r n o m r I n ' ' ' ' ' '
H ex o o mi B It q E B B r a ma r e n . SI p o c . Hepo y no ep B , a y p ' ' ' ' ' ‘ I a BB II BM . noqepe n ma r ep n n oer o npy r a om; ero cecr pu . p F E M I N I N E N O U N S 2 9
' ' ' ' ’ ' x rn r co a x E o mE aM (DB B B na na x ocu . cooa m. o ts d am . B . ' ' ' ' ' ’ ‘ I B B a cx aaa n a a r n m . I padmB B Aan a Ta nrce Bo ny n oman MB . O ' ' ’ ' ' ' ' B n osBa u . cn xca n om Br o onB Bu r i rau . I co mem. B co Jn o n M r. y , ' ' ' ' ' '
' x r a eu . cr. B mB I o CB u ma n a Bor o aB B1 . 6 a x s . Ko m a B p M ( M ) , p
' ' ' ' ' ' ' I I BH eCB Te MH B a TB Be mB . q roBs x a B r. cr. Be no w s. p y m ' ' ' ' '
’ ’ B n s arcs Bor o aB Be e B . E h Ito s/mar s 1 K ma B B b o o , p y n p 1
' ' ' ' ' ' ' ? ’ t ' t ' B BI BE B Z a B BH BJI B . I el ros rs rcr. cx as a m. MH B rro SI II I HK I . r I , JL ero , ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' T u s . SI BB Jrro e n B s B1 . Jrsc Bb Ms 6 a a c n cany y no . y '
w a s . e eBe B B a a n p .
' ' ' ' ' ' ma e n B Icor' o ro H M'L e H BH Io B x o n at a. I y n ona , py Ira a m J gr ' ' ' ' ' ' t ‘ ' m . me Bs B q n r r x cx asa JI B n o B I . a To ma . ] oe o a c a , cy n Ir 1 ; npy ' ' ' ' ' ' H B H . Ten r. e . sa Jra M B q ro oon a B Jro magu e p y xc scu . csi ro . E cu
' ' ' ' ’ ' ’ cs H o 3 a O MO M I. BJI o TH BIca. Ico x B MB IB B x or o ro 0 H a A y m , py ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ‘ B Te cn a mcs Bu r rr u . x mx . x H sc r B. CE aac y sx a o y Cooa a C AH T B ' ' ' ' ' mrc B u . n B q n s scB B c i . Ico o . Ma o a JI a o e B Jroma e n n p gr p gr , ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' a Br B TB MI . E o mx am . K e x o mex r. B cooa x s . JI e MO JI O O a Ta mrc ' ' ' ' ' '
' B rt m . B m B MB H a mB cn aca H E B B B u . B I. o giy cooa a no aJI . y xt y ' ' ' ' ' ' r H ’ grepe BI I B, a H e B r. o poms. }I{BBy TB JI B O B TaM b . HfB By TI .
' ' ' ' ' ' JI B Ta mrce BJI o u I B IcB B p aoo u I B IcB B1 . nepeBB B x s ? I I p B H ecn Te ' ' ' ' ' '
t a m B aB B1 . B s cr on a Ta ro e B n r MH B (by b ty , or o p m , a rt oga e '
' Ta6 a x s .
Th e second part of the above exercise is a brief review of
some of the principles explained in the preceding lesson s . R ead over carefully the preceding paragraphs and explain each noun
above .
LES SON VI
N E U TE R N O U N S
- - 39. Neuter nouns u sually end in 0 or e and are inflected
very much like the masculines . Th e following paradigms will
illu strate their inflection : 3 0 N E U T E R N O U N S
A D A. H R N E UTE RS B . son N E U TE RS SINGULAR opinion
' As x BTB the neu ters , with the e ception of A (child) which has a special infl ection , denote in animate obj ects , the accu sative m remain s the same as the no inative .
- m - - a n 40 . Certain soft neuters end in e, ne, me, re a d these are declined as follows :
B C . SI ILANT NEUTERS
SIN GULAR PLURAL
' ' x o xte couch ; bed (of river) Bo at a Boat - B ) ’ ' n o ma ( z Jro Bc- B ) Boats.
, ' ' ' - 11 0 c ( z no at - I o ) Jro Bt aM s Box a m .)
' ' ' n o ace x o aca nont B )
' ' I I 0 ' - n o me nu . 1 0 JR - j eM L) no ntaMB no m B MB )
' '
' Boats x o max r. ( z no at - B x i .)
Ten neuters end in - MB and are declined distinctively as follows : N E U T E R N O U N S 3 1
D . PLURAL
I ' B eMeH a N . Bpe MB p I B eMeH B G . Bpe MCH H p I ' n . D . Bpe MeH H Bp eme a m I ' B B eMeHa A . Bpe M p I ' n . B emen a MB I . E pe B e em p I I P Bp e MCI -I H BpemeB a x m
' ' These are 6 pe MB (bu rden); B MB (first n ame); Hfla MSI
' ' ' (flame); M C M Q (tribe); cr pe MB (stirru p) ; Te MSI (craniu m) ;
' l ' ' H aMeB a BB MB cs B sn a MB (banner) ; pl . S i ramerra and S ; (udder); M
' '
am . . csM B B B . (seed); n om . pl , c ena ; gen pl
' B 42 . Th e noun ABT (child) is irregular with a special declension PLURAL SINGULAR
' B G . ABT TB ' TB D . AB TB ' K‘I ‘ SI A . A ' ' ' B B B I . nB r Te (ABT TeI o) ' B P . ABT TB
- i - 43 . Note that neuters in e form the gen . pl . in i n bu t ,
- a few neu ters in B e take the gen . pl . in as n am e
' B B (garment) ; BJI a T e B , etc .
44 . H ard and soft neuters A , B and C have the zero form m m m in the gen . plu ral , the sa e as the fe inines entioned in Lesson
2 5 s m IV , . A in the case of these fe inines (IV , a vowel i s '
l . mr often in se rted in the zero gen . p ; thu s , o o (window) ' ' o xB 's n B cB Mo ( ) en ter s - 3 v o - cr o for ; letter N in ,r , ,
- x - - 11 a z c o, m o and many in 0 h ve the ero form in the gen . pl .
' ' ' as B i s cr o (place) mscm ; rn sano (nest) r niiagrs ; qy Bc o
‘ ' (feeling) I y BCTB b , etc . 3 2 N E U T E R N O U N S
- e 45 . Neuters in m which decline in the singular like
' ' - m m m B n o . JI o Bce (C) so eti es have in the plu ral , as nou n me ’ H H T (l arge hou se) AO MH I . his i s especially tru e of augmenta
- ti v es in Bme.
' ' x o mB 46 . Note that y (ear) has the irregular pl . y ; gen . ' ' ' '
me B B onox o B onortB n om . l . B n m. pl . y ; (apple) has p ; o o or '
B onox oBs , gen . pl .
47 . Th e accent of neuters is largely compen sati e . Thu s v , when in the Sing . the ending i s accented , the tone goes back in the
plu ral , and conversely , when the accent is n ot on the last syl
- lable in the sing . , the accent is on the case ending in the plural .
' ' , n m Thu s rcpy xceBo (lace); o . pl . E pyateBa ; o 6 11 a (clou d)
' ' ' ' ' 0 6JI aIt B m eBMD oonas a (also ) , bu t (postmark) m e B Ma; x BrI o ' ’ JI B a. T (face , person) n his is clearly a device to prevent a con
'
. . n om l . B a fu sion between the gen sing and the . p , as JI B gen . ' l I B a n om . . . sing . , but J n p , etc
Vocabu lary
E ng land m was ( asc . )
poor (instr .
' of 6 s nmm)
you r (neut . )
good to taste (fem . )
t aste time
deep (neut . ) m it is long ( asc . ) bottom other
still ; another they play
n ame
rel . pl . (neut . and fem . ) N E U T E R N O U N S 3 3
boat
me ( acc . and gen .)
at me sea
my (fem . )
n ation they are found
foot ; leg mm it pleases (takes dat . , as ) there i s not
' o sepo lake
' o qem . very m n apox dns stea er
B BBo beer ruffle field
m ( . ) a at the ti e of takes prep ’ a n pon sn ome n ie pronunci tion peMeH B strap ' py cno bed of river ' ( ‘ R a en . ) py ccaar o u ssi n g ' pu 6 a fish I psx a river
cns nar b to do tiresome too word glass stirru p seed now
diffi cult (neut . ) good
of this (masc . ; neut . pron . e tov o) 3 4 N E U T E R N O U N S
Ex ercise 6
I I I I I I men T B CsmeB a B1 . SI H um. Bp e B ene p . y MCH xopo I I I I I mi B cm en a B1 . c any I I pO B S H ome H i e B r or o py ccrtar o C11 0 Ba I I I I I I ‘ t Mau . B r a em. o r. sT B MB 5 qem. . TE B r o p in o p n a A pa I O T B CI . p I I I I I M B ’ KO mx aMB B I caMB . O H I re B b r n eB B O cooa ora c pe . H Aa B p r I r I r r MB P eme H b 0 r MC I-I H CJI H II I KO M' ’ MBB c pe . M ero c pe I . gum H eH b . I I I I I b M ' BH eCB Te MH B r o B eme H . m. o I eII I . ex m o B I I p npy p y . I I p I r I r r r v ‘ ‘ ' ' K / B H rs H . 131 . A H I JI I B 6mm . O I CH L 6 5 H opoma I I a apo In A HM L . U H BO 0 I v r r eme c'rax a H ' H eCB Te MH B b . 0 re xopo moe, a 11 A a H a o seps, a I I I I I I I BIc CH I B 3 Ta si ? ? n apox o m. B a mops . y a J p 6 a Kass. Ba me B MB I I I I I p MB a e a T H H KO l I a B . meB B R H B r a H B E I B H p opa y O I a . r I r r r c Ba H H KO JI a B B e H I I pO BSI I ome H i e no p A O . H BBO JI a B B r I I 0 v I ' flT SI B a n a ox o 5 x or o BB H a m s IO pI B B ax o A C p A . p op . Py cno pm I I I H e Ta Its KaK’b H O MO m rny6 0 x o , H 0 , A p
Th e student will note that all the declension s of the noun have certain general principles which are deviated from only for
x m phonetic reasons . For e a ple , the hard and soft consonants
a Th play the distinguishing p rt in all the genders . e masc . and
neuter are similar in their inflection in the genitive , dative and
- - - B . to in strumental Sing . : resp . a , gen ; y , dat . and the M
- ' - EMT. m . Th e B ending O M b ) the instru ental ending for pr ep . , h l Sin g . ru n s th rou g a l l t h e d e c e n s i o n s e x c e p t ' '
m Jro ma r. JI O ma B t h e s o f t f e . ( n n ) and the instr . and
prep . pl . i n e v e r y r e g u l a r d e c l e n s i o n
- MB - B MB - r. - have the endings a , ) a n d ax e .) r e
m a s p e c t i v e l y . Fu rther ore , the gener l sign of the n om.
m i u pl . in masc . and fe . is the vowel , either , or after palatals
B and sibilants B , and a l w a y s after the soft consonants in
- - m . S Th e n o . both masc . and fem. neuter pl ign is a, or B after m difli l soft consonants . Th e gen . pl . is the ost cu t case to form .
- O B'B m - e In hard masculines , the ending i s ; in soft asc . m., or
- B a a l e , while the ch r cteristic of the hard neuter gen . p . , like
that of the hard feminine , is the zero, i . e . the plain stem with
3 6 A D J E C T I V E
2 O ‘ IN U Class . xytone S G LAR
Masc . Neut .
' MO JI O AO H young ' n on ono r o
' MO JI O II O My ' mon ono r o ' mor ogo n ' MO JI O II N MI . ' - n onogo M r.
PLURAL
' mononu e
'
' MO I I O JI B x I.
'
' MO BO AB M I. ' mononu x 's
' mon onu e ' MO JI O IIB MB
' MO JI O II B XI .
‘ " " t l t ll l Oxy tone means Wi th the accen on the a sy ab e . A D J E C T I V E S 3 7
‘ ’ B. SOFT ADJE C I IVE S
SIN G ULAR
Fem . I CB B B B blue I CB B en I CB B eB
r CH H I O I O
PLURAL
IN U Class 2 . S G LAR
I BCJI H 3 0 6 3 8 A D J E C T I V E S
BeJI B Ici B
IN U Class 3 . S G LAR
Masc . Neut .
' I x opo miB x opo mee ' I x opo mar o xopo mar o ' I x opo mesry xopo memy ’ x m r o opo a I ' xopo In ee x opo miB
' I x opo mB m . xopo 11 m m . ' I x opo mem . xopo menu .
' I o ' x opo mie xopo mI B x opo miB ' I ' ' ' x opo m r. xopo m r. x opo m r. ' I ' x opo mBm . xopo mam . x opo mB m .
' '
' x opo m r. x opo m r. O ' xopo arm ' x opo mie XO PO I I I I SI ' I ' x opo mm m xopo [II H MH x opo mB MB ' I ' ' ’ ' x opo m r. xopo II I HX L x opo m r. A D J E C T I V E S 3 9
SOFT DENOMINATIVE SINGULAR
Fe Masc . Neut . m
' ' ' pB OiB pu OB e pH OB SI of a fish
' ' ' pB OB B ro pH OB SI I ‘ O pu OB eB ' ' ' pB OB eMy pB OB emy pN OB eB
' b fl I ‘ pH O O ' ' ’ pB OB e pN OB I O pB OiB
' ' ' ' pB GB B M B pB OB B m . pB OB eB ' ' ' ' ' pB GB eM r. pB OB eM I. pB OB eB
' ? pB OB B ' ' o pB OB B x I. ' n pH OL K M'B ' ' pB OB B x r. s ’ pH Ob H ' a pH OI s H MH ' w pH Ob KX’B
PO E I E E I E C . SS SS V ADJ CT V S SINGULAR Fem Masc . Neut . .
' ' ' ’ ' H eTpo B r. H eTp O BO H eTpo Ba Peter s ' ' ' II eT p o Ba HeTpo Ba H eT po BO B ' ' ' HeTpo By I I eTpo By HeTp o BO B
' H T o Ba e p ' ' ' HeTpO Bo I I eTpo By HeTpo Br.
' ' ' ' II eTp o BBM r. HeT po BB m . I I eTpo BO B
' ' ' I I eTp o Bom . HeTp o Bom . HeTp o BO B
' II eTpo BB I ' G . HeTpO Bux r. I ' D . I I eTpo BLIM B I HeTp o E m 'b
A . I H eTpo BB
I
I . HeTpo BHMK I ’ ' P . Herp o Bux r. 40 A D J E C T I V E S
Th e learne r will Observe that the - r o ending of the geni
' ' - v o O O ar o tive i s always pronounced ; thu s , A p , not (I o b r a g 0 , ' ' ' z- b l s h bu t d o b r a v o; Ooa o ro o o v o.
Th e r m neute inflection stands between the as c . and fem. , having the same infl ection as the masc . in the singular and
m n being identical with the fe inine in the om. an d accu s . plu ral . Th e fem. , on the other hand , while it does not Change for ani ma te and inanimate in the accu s . sing . does so in the accu s . pl .
Th e masc . pl . makes the animate and inanimate distinction in both sing . and pl .
Th e soft adj ectives have really th e same general endings
as the hard adj ectives , bu t in se rt orthographically the y
' ' B B B - B B sound . Thu s , C B B i really stands for CB ; C B B ee for
' - B - B CBB B oe; C B H B B for CBH a and so all through the inflection .
These soft adj ectives are therefore not irregular in form, bu t are mere phonetic variants .
i 49. Note the following p r nciples:
There is an alternative longer form for the fem. instr .
- a - ero sing . 0 10 for the hard Cl sses and for the soft adj ectives , as ' ' t x meo x o o meB . BCpH O B or I n oro , opo or p
- 0 B m In A , Class 2 , the accented , which is ore p rimitive
- B B in Slavonic than the ordinary , appears in the following ' : OO JI B mo B commonly u sed adjectives (big) , to be distinguish ed
' “ ' ' MO JI O O B from BeJI B E iB (great , as great II (young); esno n ' - m m TO BCT (gray haired) , and in fa ily na es , such as O B , p
' ' B O MB' Ton CT r OeTCE O , which are inflected like adj ectives , as A o o
T ma (the hou se of Tolstoy), etc . here are ny ad jectives of this ' n a class u sed as su bsta tives , bu t declined adj ectiv lly , as CTO JI O
' ' BaB (dining - room) ; TO CTB B aB (drawing - room); B B BO TB oe (an i ' T mal); n opT B o B (tailor) , etc . here are no soft attributive
x adj ectives (bu t see ne t lesson) . A D J E C T I V E S 41
To B , Class 2 , belong adj ectives with a c c e n t e d
x m s t e m s ending in r , and x , bu t if such a ste i s oxytone , ' I O O B A 2 then th e adjective i s inflected like MO J II , , Class , and
' ' '
r B r ro . . nopo o , nopo o (pr dorogo vo)
3 B , Class , although apparently hard , i s really soft , as the ' ' - ~B z x o o mar o x o o mB r o gen . aro here stands for ro p p , which
H to wou ld be impossible after the sibilant , after which also , o , , become respectively B (i), e , y . m When adj ectives are co pounded , hard adj ectives have
' ' - ccrt - aB r I their first compound element in o, as py o JI i c i B CJ O
' '
— - - Ba p t . (R u ssian E nglish dictionary); CBBTo cs pB B (lig ht gray) ; m etc . When the adj ective i s soft , the first part of the co pound ' '
- - e BB e B Mcx i B R m . ends in e, as Bp p (ancient o an)
4 m B . Class , exe plifies soft generic adj ectives . One of the most diffi cu lt peculiarities of R u ssian is the fact that where in
E nglish two noun s would be compounded to form a sing le new
- - substantive , as boat hou se , dog kennel , etc . , in R u ssian the , first word of su ch a compound mu st be a generic adjective as , ' ' ' ’ Te r CTeE JI B H B aB B s C E J o (glass) , bu t a a (glass vase); no x a (boat) n , ' ' ‘ H n - S T bu t JI O AO I HH capa (boat hed) . here are many su ch denom i n ti a ve adj ectives which can be learned only by practice .
Their u se may be avoided in conversation by the peri
' h rasti B p c u se of a preposition and a noun , as a sa ’ B3 r m 1 . c e a , (lit . a vase of glass); bu t the student should familiarize himself as soon as possible with the cu stomary
forms . 50 Th . e possessive adj ectives instanced by C may end in
‘ ’ - - - - ' - - B Ba BB 1 . B H H H a /I JI b K H i s s O BI ., O O , O ; , O , , as I L BOMB ( E l a
' ' ’ hou se) (I/I BB B E lias); cecr pB B a BB B r a (the sister s book) ; ' ' ' ’ [lap B mI B H B ns ope ru. (the Tsaritsa s (Hap B Ba Tsa ' - H rit sa. Note the peculiar forms with in serted as 6 pa TB B B 1 .
'
' my Bt B BB I. (of the hu sband) . These forms mu st also be learned by practice 42 A D J E C T I V E S
l Th e adj ective u sual y precedes the noun , although it may in the higher style and often in poetry follow the su bstantive . ' T m m e his i s also the case with so e gram atical terms , as B B B a
' ' ' c nB TeJI B I-I B B (numeral s) ; B MB cy meCTBB TeJI B B oe ( su b stan
tive) . When n ationality i s to be indicated , a s u b s t a n t i v e
S shou ld be u sed and not an adj ective , to how the national qu ali
' fi i n B B I O B B B cat o , as p a JI I i m em. (Swedish M anager) and not ' ' ' ' mBe ncx i B y n p aBJI B I O II I i B ; Ce xca H rt a B pJI a B JI E a (Irish se rvant ' ' B H cx aB B x a girl) , rathe r than e a zr CJI y xca , although thi s i s per
missible . I t will be noted th at the noun denoting n ational ity
follow s the noun qualified .
Voca bu lary
rich big poor white were vase great thing behold (v o i l a)
general
M r m . ; gentle an good (disposition) girl (not u sual)
g irl (u su al)
' v it (acc . pron . y e o ) celebrated
E li as of E lias
. YI1 p aBJl $i I O H1 lfl is an adj ective noun ( see above A , class
4 4 A D J E C T I V E S
Voca bulary (con t )
' Tpe 6 y eT1 . needs ; demands
' yAO Bo JI B CTBie pleasu re
' y srti B narrow ' y JI B Ba street '
y n paBn B I omiB manager (takes inst . )
' x opo miB good (general word) ' x pa 6 pB B brave ' x ygro c B m. arti st ' m o Ici B broad '
a Ty this (acc . sing . fem . ) ' IO BB B you thful
Ex ercise 7
' I ' ' I ' M B JI oe a B1 . B O JI s x r 5 B B r. 11 , o na ero 6 11 a B ar
' ' ' ' ' '
Ma P ccxi e x a n e c TB . 1. r B CBAS JI a JI O . y p 6 p onna P11 e epa m. ' ' ' ' ' ' x pa 6 pnx 1 . conna u ? py cc x 1 . conna n . T pe 6 y er1 . ’ ' ' ' ' ' 11 en e B B no nxy . 0 1 . T p 1 . capa s rm. JI O BE B . CeCTpa n onap B JI a ' ' ' ' ' ' T B B B s SI B t B m MBB C ea o a y . B c ma rry 6 0 11 o ro n apox o na ' ' ' ' ' ' a BTe ma eB BK M' m Bt x ' m H a m s. Z JI B I. a JI I B aM B B T 6 O JI B I o op , I y y ' ' ' ' ' ' B ' E B B ry . Ma TepB 110 6 pn me B mBBB . Mau . ro B Bx r. 1115 By ' ' ' ' ' ' ' B I ‘ I men s B onapB Jra MH B x opo mi KH H H . S To n o J e B pBB anJI eat B u . ' ' ' ' t e B Ic B m B B B 6 ora T0 My I JI O rs y . C1 . 6 O JI B M1 . yII O o JI CT iem . 11am . ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' T BB B r B B a M I eB Bx i B s T r 1 . BaM r. a y y , O T1 . O . a J n B B pa I O T r. C
' ' ' ' ' ' '
B It mrtaMB B TBx 1 . ora T1.1x 1 . mo e B I B II B a . cs pB M o . y 6 n 6 OJ I i nou ' ' ' ' ' ' B x H e x o omo scu . B1 . Cn n emi. MO ps MB o r o 6 om 1 . pn 6 1 .. p ' ' ' ' '
- It CTB P B B B B CT B n CB B Be B HeT o B 1 1 . pB 6 BB o . 6 O o a a m . p B 110 1 1 ' ' ' '
x n JI B 0 MB H a O II O B JI B s. SI B a y s o y Bs, a I1 m y m ' ' ' ' ' ' a B r rr r B T ncr r B a BB nsm. 11 0 111 1 . Ben a o py cc a o BBCa TeJI o o o, orn ' ' ' ' ' 1. e B n ? He a smo r o B B1 . P occi B . P11 I I Tpo u no a y Tp ' ' '
' x m r. MO BB B1 . H B Io - I o rns B c CT . 0 1111 . Ba opo BO p , o e m 11 ' ' ' ' ' B B CT B B B ac tI B r. B BB B n aB l O x o nBTC 1 . BO O . y r. o e C O C0 6 y p ll fl ' ' ' 5 111 c I . K MH i n 131 . e e BB s . B1 . 6 0 11 5 1 11 0 311 . 6 1 11 0 1 . O MB eT O aTa m n p A , I I I I I r s ma cca Ba TB B 1 . R uB B a JI eaca u . Baas CTB ou n p , OTO p a n y A D J E C T I V E S 4 5
I I r e ccrcon x o H B x M rco BCE M l B 1.B py y yn BI y ap O y . Mo oga 11 y mx a C1 . I I I I x a C H B MB JI e H TaMB r m. x a B Ba p o t e p C .
' Th e student will decline the combination s : 110 6 pBB ‘I C ' '
' JI O Bs m. (good person) (the plu ral of q I O Bs rcs i s
' ' ' ' 0 6 aB ace B B H a m 0 6 BTB 11 p m (g ood wo an) , and 11 poe JI (good
' ' child); also a i n 11 0 m . (blu e hou se) ; CB H B B Icpn ma (blue
' ' ' ' CB H e M e a O roof) and e O p (blu e sea) . Decline lso M JI O II O B na ' ' pen t . (young fellow); mon ona sr ns Bymx a (young girl) and ' ' ' MO BO II O e BcB Bo TH oe (young animal); noting th at BCBBO TH oe
' ’ f eT o B r. 0 m . i s an adj ective noun . Decline I I p 11 (Peter s hou se); ' ' ' ’ ’ H JI B B H a ceCTp a (E lias s sister) ; C CCTpB H O n o JI e (the sister s
field) . I f this be done thorou g hly , i t will greatly facilitate
fl uency in w riting an d speaking R u ssian .
LE SSON Vlll THE PRE DICATE ADJE C TIVE
s 52 . Th e adjective h a also a predicate or shortened
m m a for , in which it u st be u sed whenever it st nds in the p redicate relation in a sentence or Clau se . This shortened
form i s identical with the possessive form C ; thu s , instead
- 1.1 B - e - aB of the endings , o , , we find the predicate form in
- - - - 0 a 1.1e 1.1B , , and , in stead of the plu ral , of the attrib
- m B . u tive for , we find ) for all genders ; for ex , attrib .
' ' ' ' ' r or a T e r B r e r B z 6 0 a m B , 6 o , 6 o a Ta , pl . 6 o a n 1 , 6 o a m pred .
' ' ' ' ra T 6 or a T1 ., 6 0 o, 6 or a Ta; pl . 6 ora TB . Th e soft attributive declension becomes predicate by chang ing the attrib . endings
------B B B e B . B iB ee, to , , ; pl respectively ; thu s attrib . , , ,
' ' ' ' ' H B B B B C B e B H B B e CB B iB , CB ee, C ; pl . B i , C i pred . CB B , CB H ,
' '
B CB B B . a CB B ; pl . It should be noticed , however , th t all ad
e i s i - i B ar e j ct v e end ng in not soft , bu t that adj ectives of 3 B . Class 2 and B . C lass are inflected , as follows : attrib . ' ' ' ' '
R B JI B x aB . Be I B rc e B JI B Iti B BenB Iti B , BeJI B oe , e ; pl J i , e pred .
' ' ' ' '
' BeJI B It B BeJI B Ico BeJI B rca . BeJI B It B an d . x o o mi B , , ; pl , attrib p ,
' ' ' ' ' ' m x rn . x o m s x maB . x o o i e o o i B o x opo mee, opo ; pl p , p pred p , 46 A D J E C T I V E S
' ’ ' x mo x ma x 6 omB . E x opo , opo ; pl . p cept in poetry , the pred i e m m a cat for occu rs only in the no inative c se , as norm. x 0 ' ' '
' po m r. (the hou se i s large); MO pe r ny6 ox o (the sea i s deep) ; ' ' ' ' MO B mau . 6 O JI B Ba (my mother i s ill); O H B Snop o Bu (they ' ' are well) ; ns Bymx a snop o Ba (the gi rl i s well); B p an1 . (I am
S a glad) , etc . In order to how the poetic l declension of these
a m predicate forms , however , the following p radig i s given .
HARD SINGULAR ' o N no 6 p1 . no ' ' 6 G . no 6 pa no pa ' ' 6 o 6 D . no py n py
A A0 6p 0 no 6 0 1. ' ' I no 6 p1.nu1 . no 6 pBM1 . ' '
m o 6 O M1 . Pr . no 6 po 1 . n p Common Plu ral
' 0 5 135 130 5 N . 6 u 21 no p A ' - 6 I . G . no p 11 MB I . A0 6 p BM1 . D . no 6 p 6 H x 1 . Pr . no p
SOFT SINGULAR
C BB I. CB B e ( CB B e)
' ' B H B G . C H H SI C
' ' C B B I O D . C B H I O ' cB B B
A . CB B B
' ' ' C B H BM I . I . C B H B M I.
' '
B H em . Pr . C B H eMB C Common Plu ral ' ' CB B B x r.
A . CB H B I MB I . C B B B I ' Pr. CB H B x r. A D J E C T I V E S 47
53 . H ere it should be noted that adj ectives having I : or H before the attributive n om. ending insert in the predi cate form of the masculin e an 0 before It and an e before ' ' ' ' ' E i B cna om cna x o CJI a It a BB r o H , as cna n n , n , n (sweet) ; n ' ' ' ' r eB B r B o BB r o B a x s n x iB BBB BB on B , B on , n (advantageou s) ; p ’ ' ' ' ' s n rco B s n x a firm e BB i B e BeH ' rcps n om , Bp , p ( ) ; np np s , ' ' e BB o e BB a A 0 np , np (ancient) . fter sibilants , an u naccented ' ' B = B or e i s inserted , as in the su bstantives ; thu s , T BtE i B T ' ' n I I l I H H 0 . me s (heavy) , bu t O H (full) takes in the p red ’ ' 1 m n o non s, becau se othe rwise , the 1 , which u st retain its hard sound , would become soft before the e .
54. When the att ributive adjectives have a dou ble H before BB , the second 1 1 disappears in the predicate and i s ' ' ' replaced by as CO Bepme H BBB (perfect) pred . CO Bepme B s , ' ' ' B B B me BB CO BeprB e B o, CO epme a, pl . C O ep . In all perfect pass ' B ive participles this second H always falls away , as B CBB BBB ' ' ' ' : B B ' B u n B n B (wri tten) p red . B ce B, ca o , n ca a; pl . B caBB .
55 . Th e attri butive adj ective never changes the accent , bu t the predicate form treats the accent according to three
p ri ncipal Classes ; viz . ,
1 ) predicates which keep the s ame accent as the attribut r 1 r v r r O T BB B T B1 . r B r O T B w e, as o r O o , ro o O , o a ; pl . ror o BB I I I I I H K BB B B B B - B B - Ba - (ready) ; JI B , JI E B, o, B , pl . B BB (lazy) .
2) predicates which are oxytone only in the feminine p re ' ' ' ' i BBB a d cate, as B y ac B y at eB B , H y c o, B ymB (necessary); ' ' 6 s BB B 15 6 1 1 1 TBC BB C ' n 6 31 , 6a a (poor); pn TB pnr. ' TBé TBe a d pno, pn (har ) ' 3 ) predicates which are oxytone throughou t , as x opo mi B ' m ' ' ' ' x opo m1 ., x op o o , x opoma ; pl . x op omB (good) ; BB co E i B ' ' ' ’ B x ' C E B c rc B co s, BB O O , B o a ; pl . BB CO E B (high) . This differ ence can be learned only by practice and consultin g the dictionary , 48 D I E C T I V E
Vocabu lar y
a but ' 6 ora TB B ri ch
6 paTB brother ' BeJI B Ici B g reat ' BB a a she saw
' Bcer na always ' BB co x iB high ' TO TO BB B (B1 .) ready (for _
na yes I 11a T1 . they give I no 6 pB B g ood (morally) I arm 10 I know
I ' C I ‘O his (pron . y ev o )
ee her (acc . )
8 11 1 8 still ; yet I B MB epa Top1 . emperor ' Ira a a B every ' Borna when
' IcpaCB BBB beau tifu l ' BO To B e ma p relative ; sc , pl . ' JusH B BB B lazy ' Jrro nB people ' ma a n x 's boy ' MO B m y (fem . ) ' B an B caB o written ' B y c I BB necessary I O B B they (masc . ) ' O B O it ' O T'Bs an's dep artu re H CTp ’B Peter ' BBCB MO letter A D J E C T I V E S 49
I BB mymaB type - wri ter B au mH a weather everywhere
please
they help (d at . ) indu striou s R u ssia hand world in the world blu e miserly too
also
good (in g eneral) school generou s
I I I ‘ I I I I B T x o oma . I ex ons CB B e MO ceC pa p no 6 p1 .. M o pe 1 r r r 1 e CT B E aCH BB 6 a TE B BB (CB B ee) C p p a p no 6 pB . SI r I I r r I o o ’ B x o B qem . CB B I B B op B . Korna oro na poma , MO p B O Bcro ny o I I I I I I I ‘ B eCT a BB sna q I O Bs I ra R O H b . CB B . C p n , TC pBB O l e 6 ora T1 . I I I I I I I ‘ r TB x 1 . Jrro e B cx n B r M11 0 ro 6 o a n y , H 0 B 3.1 1 a MB O I O 6 0 a I I I I I I o B K T B e o 6 B B e H B MHO B TBx 1 . m ne , O O p n p m a . O ro OMO o r n I r r . ’ ' r 1 . 11 10 B MB . H C T / T c B OBB1 . a I O T1 . 6 1.a n DL , I I MBepa op I. P oc x , I I I I I I I ' e B o 1 . B e s . S TO B B CB MO x o mo H aII H caH o . B JI K b , n 6 p m np po I I I I I B m eB - H H a B M lI I H x B . O 0 11 0 B arI B ca o y m a l I B, a H e py o T I I I I I I I - ? ' 1. 1 . r O To B1 . E a . To B1 . BB o6 an1 . O 6 n . O Ha yace TO TO Ba 1 . O T Bs ny 50 A D J E C T I V E S
I I I I ' ' M b m mm, mBU L x or a om, 6mm, D L mx a n m 6 1m o ms. a M , n ll ,
' ' ' ' ' ' ' sH B s H 0 cecr a B e u B B n om , o qem , Jn B , ero p ms a, o a a B e m ' ' ' ' ' H Ten e b H H a B a n ' é B a. BTa BB B ra M B p ym ; on r e m us e noma ’ ' ' ' ' n B Cr a m B1 ; r o o s Bu co xB H O MO B ow , 8 1 : e c y . Ao a p n , n n p Bms '
B e Bu co n .
Note the u se of the instrumental to denot e predicate
relation , especially after the past ten se , It is permissible to ' '
' ' say 0 11 1 : 6 am, JI BH H BH M B or own , msH B B B (he was indu stri ou s) , m u sing the in str . or the predicate short for of the adj ective .
ifier n In the participle , note the d e ce between the attri bu tive ' ' ' H an B H H oe B B B M form, as ca C O (a w ritten letter), and BB CB MO '
B an B CaB O (the letter is written) .
Let the studen t give the attributive and predicate forms of all the adj ectives in the above ex ercise .
L E SSO N lx
COMPARISO N O F ADJECTIVES
56 . Th e attributive comparative (also su perlative in m meaning) , i . e . the inflected ad jectival form, may be ade by
- - n - - n Chang ing the endings xm , o , to Bn mi B amn i , see be low , Th e predicate comparative , on the other h and ,
- “ T becomes in variably se, E H which i s indeclinable . hu s ,
' ' C m B B - B - c n a (strong) attrib . CBB s n mi n , a , c, like a soft
' ' B adj ective , as CBn B b n mi B qenO BB m. (the stronger or strong
' ' est person); CBJxB HB n maB xte u mmi a (the stronger or strong '
m. m 6 3 6 7 . qen O Bs e st wo an) ; see below , § ; etc , bu t ' ' ' CBa s e (the person is stronger); me H mB H a C BJxB HB e (the
' ' B z: woman i s strong er); cna 6 u n (we ak) cna s n mi pred .
’ ' s e m u ma Bo n cnaé , etc . Si ilar adj ectives are G n n (poor); ny p ' '
(evil); cqacu B Bim (happy); MBBO CTB Bu n (g raciou s) , etc .
52 A D J E C T I V E S
Attribu tive Comp . Predicate Comp . I I TBepns mu m TBe pace I I mu m 6 or a qe I I H p O CTB mu m n po me
‘I HCTB n mi n ‘U I me
I P CTB Bmm r e y y m , or ry CTB e
a 59. Generally speaking , the following t ble of sibilant
interch ang e may serve as a guide to the formation of the
predic ate comp arative :
an d 3 an d m ax . m ac r , n co binations , as , etc , beco e . r I as a : CT o r m TBe Thu s , bove p pa (hard) I I I w e p nce; B B 3 1cm (low ;
I I m T TK B = T . i B q K and beco e q hu s , xopo (short) opo e; I I 6 0 r a Tu n (ri ch) 6 or a Be .
I I T n n fi z CE and CT become m. hu s , x o cm ( at) nn o me; t ‘ e nzfcn m (clean) I H m .
60 . This change to a sibilant does not take place in
- T B - - T the case of adj ectives in B C u , BTx.m, ac HH ; thu s ,
A m a ttribu tive Co p . Predic te Comp .
0 - TB Hml fl
l CTB HHI I H GTBC
I TB Hml fl
I CT b flml fl (31 1 58
Th e following adj ectives show irregul arities ;
m Predicate Co p . Attributive Comp .
I I 6 0 na me BCJI H'l a mu m
0 6 0 b me 6 0 Bb mm I I na n b me nan b m. mu m A D J E C T I V 53
0 rny6 0 qa mu m
I me H B mm
' We" mau n mm )
' ' monono n young MBa nmi B
' ' cna nx i n sweet cx anma mni n
' ' CTa pu B old CTa pmi B
' g ood By qmi n ' ' ' m o x i B broad 6 o nse m o xi n ' m O qa n mi B ' ' bad x y xce x y nmi B ' thin x yni s e x yns n mi B
a a 62 . In addition to the bove , the following dj ectives show irreg ular predicate forms :
Positive Predicate Comp .
' ' B B sxi B low B B Bce ' ' me nx i B shallow mc a e ' ' y axi B narrow y xce ' ' T TCTB B T e O J thick , fat o n m
' ' To n Bi B thin T O H B me
' liquid BCB Bce ' ' p a B BJm early pa H B me (also formerly) ' ' no Ju ‘ i B long (time) no n b me ' ' x opo TBi B short Bopo qe ' ' xp s mci n firm R ps rme ' ' nopor o B dear nopo xce ' nemeBuB cheap neme Bne ' ' r o pB Bi B bitter r o pqe ’ ’ ma p B Bi B hot ma pqe
' ' xce z Not to be confu sed with y already . “ ” ' Fat of human beings more politely B o n mm I pred . no m m. 54 A D J E C T I V E S
63 . Sometimes the variou s forms of the comparative
' ' ff m K m have di erent eanings , as p a cm , red Bpacu s e redder ,
' ' “ but Kpa me more beautiful ; Bpa cmm orig inally meant beau t ifn l and is still u sed thu s in popular speech .
As m - n n - n indicated above , the for s in B mi , a mi n are “ ”
a . really superl tives in the sense very strong , etc , bu t the following adj ectives are always u sed in the attributive form as comparatives
' Bu cmiB high
' H B ami B hovv
' ' AM L HB H II I IPI far (also na j I m )
CTapmi B old
' MJra nmi B young ' Ji y qmi n ggomul
' x y nmiB bad
' 6 o n b mi B big
' me H B mi B smaller ' ( I little MeH m H young er
O O 0 In comp ari sons me m e 1 5 u sed (see note to exercise below) .
h a 64. T e idea somewh t added to the comparative i s
' ' e x pressed by the prefix n o qTo - H B 6 y nB no - n qme (some
' - eme BJx a thing somewhat better); no n e (a little che per) etc .
‘ ’ 65 . Than after the comparative may be indicated by
' H e eJI B ‘I BM ’L R a n B ac , , i , or by the g enitive of the noun , as ' ' Jx e j am 1 mm Barn MO o ace H xce m Bu (I young er than you ) , or , ,
' '
' H JI O acm m a om, B B meT s n a Bu ) , or MO xce B Si il rly , y
' ' ' ' ’ ‘ ’ n KaK Mb r n q T Bs m om. n n men me B e me B ( b , Hs ) npy o O , or ' ' ' n qme npy r o r o BeJI O Bs Ba (he writes better than the other
man) . A D J E C T I V E S 55
Th e idea mu ch (better) i s ex pressed by the adverb
' ' ' r m r o a a o n am m opa sno with the co parative , as p n y e ( uch better) ; ' ' r B . opa sno C ms e (much bluer) , etc
66 . Th e accent i s regulated by the following ru le : all the irregular predicate comparatives are accented on the
s m a penult , as shown above . A to the regular predicate co p
r i 15 Be at v es, the accent falls on the of the ending , if the ' n n ns A adj ective be bisyllabic , as a o ( evil) ; a e . dj ectives of m more than two syllables retain the tone in the co parative , ' B aCB Bu B — where it lies in the positive , as p (beautiful) Kpa
' R CB Bse. As is cu stomary with rules as to accent in u ssian ,
' ' a o o BmB — s B there are some exception s to this , as n p nopO s e ' ' ' ' (healthy); x on o nH u B — x on onn s e (cold); r opa q — r opa qs e
(hot) , u sed of su bstances and the feeling s in contradistinction
' enmm m B . T m Ten to aca pBi , u sed of the weather (war ) ; co p .
' all Jus e , is u sed in senses .
As to the attributive comparatives , the accent falls al
- - B B w ays ou the a in a mi .
6 7 . Th e su perlative i s expressed most commonly by
' the u se of ca Mu B before the positive form an d sometimes
' m a m before the co par tive for of the adj ective , as ca MLi B '
o 6 u a 6 aTT. m n p p the best (in oral sense) brother . Note , ' a ca Mu n howeve r , th t this i s inflected throughou t , the same
' ' '
m . ca Maro o as is the positive for ; thu s , gen n 6 paro 6 pa Ta; ' ' '
d at . ca Mom o 6 om a T y n p y 6 p y , etc . and that it i s treated as
'
a regular attributive adj ective . Note the combination ca Mu B
' ' ' ' ' n aw n ca MaB qmaa ca Moe JI qmee y i ; l ; y (the best) , where
m p: m Ca is u sed with the co parative form . This combi nation
' ma y be u sed attributively or p redicatively , as ca Mu B 6 0 m,
' ' ' ' mo B rm. T o no (the bigg est hou se) , and B O T b n m , ca 1mm By q
m n i (thi s hou se is the best) , althou g h it is better to
' ' ' express this tu rn by s aying B TO TT, nO MT. n q me npy r B x T.
(this hou se is better than the others) . 56 A D J E C T I V E S
h e 68. T superlative i s expressed also by the prefix
' ' B t miB H amme u b m n m H aB as H a n r (best) ; i (s allest) . Closely
’ allied with this u sage is the form with n p e as n pexp a crum
' (most beautiful); now u sed simply for beautiful : Bpen ono 6
T B e m m (ve ry reverend) , etc . his p occu rs also in the word ' n p eBocx o nHzm (ex cellent) .
Th e comparative form followed by the word BCBXL' (of m all) i s still another way of for ing the su perlative , as
' ‘ ' ’ ’ CBJI B H B Bmi B H Bb BCBX b (the strongest of all) . We find Bcer o
' ' e BCB MB m (of all) and m xcny (a ong all) , u sed in the same ' ' ' ' qmi n Bcer o u e xc Bcs MB sense , as n , or ny (be st of all) .
69. A few adj ectives , of which the following are the m most u sual , take the attribu tive Co parative in a su perlative ' ' ' sen se : BB CO Bi B - Bu coqa n mi n (hig h - highest) ; BeJTB x i B - be
' ' ' - - m n n - JI Bqa B miB (g reat greatest) , ma Mans mi n (little littlest),
' ' as 6 e3 1 , Mams n mar o CO MBB B i sx (withou t the slightest doubt) ;
' ' ' ' e y 6 o BiB - r ny 6 oqa n mi n (deep deepest) ; qB CTu B BB CTs n mi n
' ' ( Clean cleanest) ; mo6 e 3 mm mo 6 e3 u s n mi n (amiable most
' ' o or o B - axca n mi n m ar - amiable); n p np (ste np dear dearest .
Voca bu lary
O Ame p a Ameri ca I o amepB Ka c i n American ' 0 0 O aB rJn n cx m E nglish I p 6 a 3 1cm (comp . 6 m xce) near I 6 0 n a me more larg er I o 6 0 me more (in comp . )
6 paT'5 brother I I 6 5 nu u n ; - H!s e poor I 6 5 mm m. poor person
Bacq. you (accu s . ) ' Bau m; (f Ba ma you r A D J E C T I V E S
' q pa yesterday
' Bu co xi n high
' r opa sno much more ' r pamma TBKa grammar
' r pammaTB Becx i B grammatical ' ' ry CTo B ry me thick ' nan emn na n b me far ' ' nemeBrm neme BJxe Cheap ' nopo r a road ' Ape n other ' nyp B o n bad ' ns BymBa girl ’ ' ma pKi B wa pae hot ' ' men sn aa nopo r a r aflvvay
JKBTB to fiv e ' 3 B a eT1 . knows
m am. knew ' B 3 6 a hu t ' Bopo TKiB Bopo qe short
' BpaCB Bu B se pretty
' 31 2mm ne rqe easy
i n ter r . particle
' e qme better best
' JI BH B BB B Be lazy ’ m MO B ; (f.) MOSI y
' ' MO Jxono B MO JI O Bce young
mym'b hu sband
’ MB CTO place
H aC$ u s 'm H ams ; (f . ) B a a ou r
' H a me n of ou r (femf,
' H e xcelm than
' H E 3 Kifl H u ace I D O TO My ‘I TO becau se 58 A D J E C T I V E S
' n oqemy why
n oaTomy therefore
' pa B B me formerly ' penB rio amm religiou s ' P occi sr R u ssia
' pyx a arm ; hand
' ca mu n most
' CBB H B B pig
CBBT 'b world
' B a C Bs Ts in (on) th e world
' CJro Bo word
' cno xcmm involv ed
' cero nB sr to - day ' ' CTpo riB CTpo xce strict ' CTyne H Tfs stude n t with
' Ta Bxce also
TaKT so ' To n cm n fat ' ' To qx a sps B i sr point of view '
u e n . gen . of 3 p s i ( )
' TpO H H H Ka path
' yno 6 H o convenient ' ' arri n y me comp . of y n arrow '
' y B B Bep CBT e T xa university
'
H B . a yBe m schol r in school (g . ' q TeJxB teacher in school
' (bo pma form ' ' x yno B x y me bad
tram . th an ' m o Ki B broad ; wide
' mrco na school
3 Ta thi s (fem . ) I $1 3 11 ! 3 1 7 language ; tongue
60 P R O N O U N S
LES SON X
THE PRON OUN
PERSONAL PRONOUNS
I mcB B
M H b
I MeH B I MHo ro (MB O B)
I 0 6 0 MH B
y ou . ye
' (T0 6 O B)
' em (masc . ) O B B (f . ) I O B T om. (they) ' ' ero B XT. ( a s)
' ev n pr . y ofi y ev o ' emy (H emy ) H M'b ( H E M 'L)
' ' ero (H ero ) B X'b (H H X'B)
' K M$ B N B
' B B MB H B MB
o H é M $ O H BXI'
I 0 11 0 it ' ’ I 9 ero ( B ero )
' 9 F eMy ( R emy) I er o ( H er o) P R O N O U N S 6 1
B MT L H E MB
P . o H e mT
' ' B aC ’b B 's 70 . Note that the genitives mcH B , Te6 , H , ac , T etc . are N O possessives , bu t genuine genitives and u sually
' ' B H cB B appear governed by preposition s , as O TH O CBTe Jx O m
' ' B B a (concerning me); no n o ony e (reg rding her) . When , how
ever , preposition s are u sed with the variou s cases , they
- en d . generally take the prefixed H form before the g . , at , ' O Bono instr . and prep . of the third personal pronoun s , as
' ' B n C B MB m ero (around h im); in . B e (to her); 1 . H (with the ) , etc . Verbs which take the gen . are followed by the pu re ' ' ' ' B 10 C 1. eB H X L gen . of the 3 p . pronouns , as 6 0 ero , , (I h i fear m , her , them) .
' 11 Note that the accu s . of 0 6 is always ero , even thou g h
am a it may refer to an in animate obj ect . In the s e w y the ' a H B 1 1 1; HX'L e ccu s . of O , 0 (they) i s always , irrespectiv of the
Character of the obj ect .
The B m E M’b HX'L BB B initial of the for s , , is pronoun ' __ kh ccd y yee , y ee , y ee mee . It is reg arded as vulgar to pronounce the gen . of m m (eB ; y ey a h) the same as e e; yey o ) the accu s . , althou g h some grammars recommend this u sage . m P R O N O U N S I I
Th e m . . er o I S asc and neu ter pronounced y ev o , as the r is the gen . ending , which sound s as v .
PO SSE SlVE PRONOUNS
' ' B oe B (moe ro)
I 0 MOC H
I i i a my I I ma meB (H a mero)
I
0 H a. HIGH
Plu ral
I ' MO B (all genders H a mB (all g enders) ' ' ' MO B x x. B a m t . ' ' MOB B T. B a mB m . ' ' ' MO B x x. B a m T.
' ' MO B H a mB
' ' MO B MB H a mB MB
I I ’ MO B x 1 1 H a II I BX I:
N 0 I Th e TBO B T a TBO B C BO B C Boe possessives , oe , ; , , I g B e ossessw e CBO resp . thy and the refl xive p , applicable P R O N O U N S m
T O B . au m to all three persons . hey are inflected exactly like M B ,
' ' B B au a me , Ba ma (you r , pl . ) i s inflected precisely like m.
' I B 72 . Th e 3 p . possessives are ero (his) , e (her)
’ and HX L (their , both genders) which are prefixed to the noun
’ i n i and have no flex on . Th e other possessives given above
O B m BO B r aum. m M ( y) , T (thy) , H a m . (ou r) , B (you r), u st agree with the nouns and adj ectives qualified exactly like adj ec ti s ve . In fact , these forms are merely soft adjectives .
' ce6 B CBO B 73 . Li ke , can be u sed only when it refers to the su bj ect of the sentence and , as stated . applies to all
' ' ' B B e m three persons . Thu s , Bu m C oro c Cp (I see y sis ' ' B ter) , thoug h one may say equally correctly : BB c Moro ' c eCp . This latter exception , however , does not apply to ' ' ' m ‘ 3 . BB T BO IO CC the p ; thu s , om . nB T. C C p ean s he sees ' ' ' ’ ‘ ' 0 1 1 1 . BB B e his own sister , bu t n T r. ero c Cp he sees his
’ ’ (some one else s) sister .
'
74. Similarly O B B (they) and its n om. fem. 0 111; are not distinguished by the vulgar and sometimes even by those
' of higher class , both forms being pronounced O B B irrespective of gender , bu t this i s not to be recommended .
75 Th e 2 p . pl . in all its cases is always written Bu with a capital in correspondence for the sake of politeness ( Cf
' Th 76 . e reflexive pronoun ce6 B i s inflected as follows withou t a nominative
'
G . ce6 B '
D . ce6 15
'
A . ce6 B ' '
I . co6 o B (co6 o ro) '
P . o ce6 1s I Th e possessive 3 p . pl . is sometimes expressed ' ' ' B B B soft adj ectiv al form B x B i , B x B ee, B x B , bu t th i s the best style . M P R O N O U N S
- U nlike many of tli e other Indo Germanic langu ages , the reflexive refers to all three person s and to both n u m ' ' ' ' B BB xc ce6 B m Tu Bu B C C Q bers , as y (I see y self); a O
' ' (thou seest thyself) ; 0 1 1 1 . BB nBTT. ce6 B (he sees himself) ; MB
' B BB nB MT. ce6 (we see ou rselves) ; etc . It i s u sed idiomatic
' ' ' s a' T CB ca Mo O ally in many phrases , a pa y MB e C 6 O 1O (th at
‘ ’
a : . a g oes withou t s ying) lit that u nderst nd s itself ; cf . Germ . d a s v e r s t e h t s i c h v o n s e l b s t . It frequently con
' ' ‘ ’ Ta notes the idea quite , pretty well , as m. ce6 1s (so so) ; a Ta
’ ' ' s K x o oma C O 6 O B n By m a p (that g irl is quite nice looking) . It ' 1 1 H B also denotes continuity , as 0 1 . 2K €T1 > ce6 1s TaMT. (he li ves
' ' ' there continu ou sly) ; B sameMB m. ce6 1s n a n em. (I pinched my ' T B [for myself] finger) . his ce6 i s su fli x ed to the verb in ' m - C B B JI aeT Cfl d oes the for after a con sonantal verb , as A (it
r . a ) , a . I itself it is done t king the place of a p ssive f , how
- m ever , the verb for ends in a vowel , the reflexive form is '
- 1 . O H 6 0 B JxaC 1. C , as a (she feared) . In Old R u ssian , this was ' B JI B T written 6 0 aC . here are many reflexive verbs in R u s
' m H a BB B sian , where this for appears, as p TC MHB (it pleases
'
n on a BBJI ocr. me - C 1. me) , but p (it pleased ) , with , becau se
0 I - i n H O H - b the verb form ends a vowel : pa BHl I O C .
In g eneral , the refle x ive pronoun i s always u sed when
' it refers to the su bj ect of the sentence , as a Bamu Te
'
aTz. ce6 B ro m em ) n qa (order so e tea [g ] for you rself .
7 7 . Note that in the accu s . , both sing . and pl . of
BO B C BO B B au m Bau m MO B , T , , , , the same rule applies as
' a that seen in the infl ection of the su bst ntive ; viz . , M 0 e ro ,
' ' ' ' B ero H m Ba mer o Taoero , C o , a ero, , are u sed with animate
O B BO B C BO B H am's B u noun s and M , T , , , a m. with in an im ates:
, ' ' ' B 11 1 0 6 11 10 C Boer o O T a m B (I love y father) , bu t B BB xry
Th e C BO B m om. (I see my table) . pronou n Baum. in all
m a its parts u st be written with a c pital , when it refers 2 to the p . sing . in polite u sage (cf . P R O N O U N S
o I I p Th e i m B TBoe B CBoe B H a meB nstr . for s Moe , , , , and
Ba meB are more frequently u sed th an the fuller forms
10 o . Moe , etc . , given in parentheses ab ve
' ' ' n l s O B TBO B and CBO B Note that the om. p . M , are ' ' ' a e e sv a e e pronounced in two syllables mayc e , tv y , y and
O B O B CBO B are to be carefully distinguished from M , TB , m oy , tvoy , svoy , pronounced as monosyllables .
' ' s TO Ts- Bamq. 78. Th e parti cle ace is confirmatory , as ' CTO JI ’L ? o B - Bre m (is that you r table an s . M (it is ine);
' ’ ' a To no n e B a me (i s that field Moe - me (it is mine) etc . If the particle To is su ffix ed to the possessive , it
MO B - m g ives the sense of a question , as To (do you ean
Vocabular y
(soft masc . ) motor vehicle
larger ; largest
l arge she was wine you see he sees
' behold; (voila ) yesterday they spoke he speaks income mirror m relative ( asc . ) coffee roof little
about ; concern ing m P R O N O U N S
Voca bul ar y (Cont )
6 6 0 (before prep . M B 1.) abou t
' B O Tep B m. he lost
' B pB B mB they came on foot ' B pO Ba JxB they disappeared
' ' cer o nB B to - day ( sev o dn y ah ) ' C a JI B sat ' TeB e p x. now
CT. with (with instr . )
BaB tea
Ex erci se 1 0
I I I I I ' K n ma m o BH CO Ka m . BB BT Bac 1. B a p Ba ero n Ma . O n T. B ac . I I I I I I SI B X’ B B B B eB B my H b a pB B1 1. ero no Ma . y ero (y y I I I I I ' I ' B H H X L) xopo BB B aBTO Mo6 B l b . O B 1. B O Tep 11 1 . C B0 1O BB B ry I I I I I I I B T B ' (ero BB B Ty ) . O H B B O Tep JI K CBO B BB B B . K B TB y H B Xb I I I I I I B B B B pO a JI H . 51 BB my ce6 B1 . se p BaJu. B BB BB nBT e ce6 I I I I ' ’ MeB B 6 0 11 1 .B1 0 B ox o 1. B o BaC b e e 6 0 11 1 .1B 1 B . B BB y n n , y m O I I I I I I
M B Te C 8 6 5 B ro a t en . TI o a BTe eB K0 ( e O B a a (p r itive g ) n b . I I I I B ’ B BB B m me H B’ TO Bo B o nana BaM b BB o (or) a (so e w ) . O p TT. I I I ’ ' - BBB JI B m . 0 6 0 MH B B eB H H M b H x s . a H O a Ta (o , o , o u ) I I I I I I ’ C b MB q a Z a B O B a 6 1.111 a C1 . B B MB B B . Ba p , I , cero n I I I I I I I M ' m O B B B p B Bu B H eMy B e B , B1 . B B NFL , in . B a s) . H a a I I I I I c T B 5 M C M 'b eC pa TO opB j i a 0 Ba C1 . (0 B B x i ., 0 N 6 ) . B 1 . B B I I I I I I ’ TO BO B 0 B [H HX x C JI H C 1 . B e B B1 . B e u . p 1m a b nO Ma i .. MB a a m n I I I I I ' ' ’ o w. B TO Bo B BB 0 eB R HB r s BoT b B x oM b . H Br e n p . r. A ona I I I I I I 9 T B a T - CB cer B B ? o C oeMy 6 p y . BB nanB BB Bu O 1O ceCp o n I I . I I I ' ' ' a B BB u n . ee . B1.! BB anB MO B XT. ceCTe i . i . q a Il , n n p y Bac p , I I I I I 00 I B o TeB e 1. 0 1 1 1. Moer o 6 a Ta X T u B x BBeTi . CBoe B p y p , O O p y I I I ' B C H b K M b T zs Ma Tep u 1 . Ma JI O o pon .
Note that MB C 1 . H BMT. (we with h im) ; Mu C 1 . B eB (WC
' T m B on a m. with her) he and I ; she and I . h e idio p y ' e B M B (it disappeared at me) I lost it .
P R O N O U N S
I cero C i e (C e) ceB
C I . B MT C HMB
’ ' P . o C C M L o C C Mb
Ca r m is not u sed Often , and chiefly in idio atic expres ’ ' ' sions such as cefl‘l a C ’L (immedi ately); ci ro MB B y Ty (in a mi n
' ' ( cer o B B z cer o B B da = - ute); n n (this y , gen . of time) to day ;
'
' ' no CH Xb B op 1. (until now) ; B To B cé (both this an d that) ;
B B ceMT. p (herewith enclosed) , u sed in correspondence .
' ' T his pronoun often appears in dates , as cero Ms CB Ba '
m a a . (this onth) , u su lly abbrevi ted c . M ; cero ro na (this year) abbreviated C . r .
Th e TO T’L as ar 80, pronoun occu rs a sort of definite
' ' i l a t c e before a relative clau se , as T Bce B mB B a, BO TO p O B B ' nam. BB B r y (the woman to whom I gave the book); TO T1 . ' ' ' ' b t r Ma n mm , BO To pa o B BCTpB T BJn . B a y nB Bn (the boy whom
met a sa TO T‘b I in the street) . It i s not u su l , however , to y '
' O M Tam . as a TO T x. n T. (that hou se there) , is u sed in such
- phrases (see above TO T 1. is very common in compo
' siti m a as B O TO M on with prepositions in idio atic phr ses , y
' ' O aTB M a B o (therefore) , often no TO My ; 3 1 . (then , afterw rds);
' ' ' '
- TO MT. (afterw ards); m. ToMy >1t e (besides); Bp o Ms Toro ( be
a a sides) ; 3 a To (on the other h and) . Note th t this l st ex
‘ ’ R a as in pression never mean s therefore in u ssi n , it doe s
' ‘ ‘ T T a TO TT. e me western Slavonic . O I . oft n the for r the ' ’ ‘ ’ a To s n o a . To l tter . B n th t i s the thing is a frequent
m . resu ptive , like French p u i s
' Th e old pronoun O B B B is now u sed in bu siness
‘ ’ am ma correspondence , as in the sense of the s e in for l
e a Bo correspondence in E ng lish . Not , however , the phr se ' " m. C Ta B 11 Bp e MB 6 11 0 (in d ays of yore) , syn . of p y . P R O N O U N S w
' ‘ ’ Th e am ca MB B 82 . idea s e i s ex pressed not by (see
' e m a o a B m b low) , but by the u se of the nu er l n T. (one) , co bined I I I I W TO T1 . me as o n B 1 . B TO T Bee BeBO Bi.K1 . am ith , n (the s e person) ; I I I I I onB a B Ta - 11< e nB Bymx a (the same g irl); onB o B To a re (one I I I ' an m E h o B o M1 . B To MT - o w. d the s a e thing) . Note n xt e n (in one o I an d am z am a To nic m a the s e in the s e hou se) . Note th t e e n s
I y I f Ta m e r ss n a . O m a ex e w . l so , syn , which is the ore eleg nt p
I I I I I I Ta c B TaBo e TaBa B TaKO BO B TaBO Bo e T aBO Ba B 83 , o , , ; , ,
I I I a KO B - xce T KO e - T B - (such a one); Ta , a Bce, axa xce (j u st su ch a
o 0 I - ee one) are declined ex actly like adj ecti ves i n o B . (S
IN TE RRO G ATlVE PRONOUNS
4 KTO ( ) BT O a BeB ‘I b e BB B 8 . who ; (wh t) ; , , (whose , belon
' m K O B a i n ter r g ing to who ) and aB (which , wh t) , . attributive , are pu rein ter rog ati v es and are declin ed as follows
SIN G U LAR
‘I TO m P R O N O U N S
SN GU LAR
' ' x axo e x axa B
' ' Bax o ro xax o B
' ' BaBO My Bax o B
PLURAL
' ' Baxi e x aBi B
' Bax B x i .
' R aKH M 'b
'
x aBB x i .
' ' Kax i e BaBi B
' BaBB MB
I KaKK X'B
The TO BTO mm R pronouns B and are co only u sed , in u ssian mm g ra atical works , to indicate the cases ; thu s , to show that a
verb takes a dative case , we find in the dictionaries such an '
an . BO M aTB . indication as n y , i . e . , to give (n ) , taking the dat , ' ' '
BO M n 11 aro a B T1. B r y being the dat . of o; 6 n p o o than k , taking ' t or the accu s . , x o being the accu s . of E TO . I TO and its in flection
'
' am ii a is Tr. ‘ M is also u sed in the s e sense , as B n I b b (to be master
i B . m of) , tak ng the instr . , indicated by BisM , the instr of BTO . So e
'
- times th e cases are actually n amed BEMB BBMT B ane mi .
the prepositional case; the in strumental case , etc . , cf . 3 . ' ' ' - Th e Ba e Bci. for . BEMB B ma word n case , so that , ex , ane
- B . the OMB case , i e . th e prep . case , etc .
Th e r Ben an ad t e 86 , p onoun is u sed like jec ive agre ing ' ‘ BeB oMi . I b fl x eBa with the noun qu alified , as n (whose hou se); '
t i . i (whose wife) ; r 2z B o Ji e (whose field) , and is decl ned through ' ' ' ' '
o Ma meBu Bo m etc. ou t with the noun ti ero n ; d B ; abero , P R O N O U N S fl
Vocabu lary
he will be were
was (masc . ) lady
Bops u ntil n ow friend I think to do
thing ; matter
to - morrow as
fem. rel . , dat .
and prep . I MBBy Ta minute I MO men . can I B o rna never I I onB H 'L B To Ts' - nice I I onB o B To me the same I I O nB a B Ta ace
' B epo pen ' Bo cms 3 aBTpa day after to - morrow ' B piis x aTx. come (in vehicle) ' ceBBa c's- Bce immediately ' Tax o B such ' x O Ts Jn . wished ' BBTa m. read
Ex ercise 1 1
I I I I I ' ' ' 9 T I BeJi O B cx a 11 BT B B e xceT i . B us x ar i. B1 . TO . aa s , O O i . Mo p I I I I I - ' ' a BT a 1 6 eTi . B C B O CAB 3 a Br a. BoT b O M i. H m. 33 p , 1 0 y n y a 1 . p n n P R O N O U N S
' ' ' ' ' B Ji T B i eB I BBB BO To O MB q a r O Bo B B . I I O sc B , o p p p on aBTe a ' ' ' ' ' ' '
' ' a TO M r ocn o B B S T H a Ms a TB Mi . JI EO SI M B. Z O CBx i. y n y O n ; A , I ' ' ' ' ' ' - ' ' ' B B B e BB iJ I B B o om. 6 eT 1. H aCb Ciio op i. ero n , y n y MBB y Ty . ' ' ' '
' - ’ B eT H H . T s B mx O m. ce Ba CB Bce 6 y n 1 . y X b a n y a, BO To pO B B ' ' ' ' ' ' ' L B sa Ji a qTo B a B e M xceT i . is Ji aTB T ‘ nam. I I HC MO C a , O o n oro , I TO ' ' ' ' ' ' B x - e BB r B B TOT ’I ' Tis J1 1 .. S T O B a B Ta Bt B a. m . . are 0 o n O n nO M s . ' ' ' ' ' '
- B s Ji T B r BeB Bs Ba R m. om . B B O O B To Bce o. a o o O a BB r n n , , o na ' ' ' ' ' ' ' SI B BBT x B BB B fl B o e a m. Ta o r B . q b B e BB a B. rna a Ta
' ' ' ' ' ' BB B r ? H e B B o Mai o BT B a H a JI eXCH ‘ a 3 a 1 o , ny , O O a A T L Ba me ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ? ' T K M BB JI B B e o SI al i i . T M M My O By . O y na Moe p n ero o y a BB ' ' ' ' ' ‘ B B m M o M q a q a ' ’ I H Ky , BO TO pB , 6mm. B 1 . a e i . n s p . TO T i . AO M b ? ' ' ’ ' ' ' i ‘ ? ? I B B BB B r a ? B epo Koro BB BB nsJi B cer o nB B SI Bu ' ' ' ' ' ' Ju. B 11 1. 0 B JTB nia . CBO i O MaT I. B a aBTO MO 6 B a 6 0 B1 y Bs . C1 . BB MT. ' ' ' ' ' ? ’ ' BB 6 B Ji B SI C0 C BO H M L 6 pa T O M 1. (co CBO B MB 6 pa TB B MB)
’ ’ ' ' ' ' ' ? ' Be m . T B BT B Bb M i . o B B a y JI H II ls. O KO M I. (o M i.) o O op O e n Ms O a ' ' ' ' ' ' ? C1 . BB e B ceCTp o B B BB nazu . BaCT. cer o nB B y TpO M s ' ' ' ' ’ c ar C b ceCTp o B H a mero npy r a Mapx o o.
m O 87 . Note that CT. (with) beco es C before a word begin ' CB ' ning with c and another consonant , as CO O B M B.
' N B BBor a B e BB h n' T 88. ote the double negative in n n s. hi s i s th e common u sage .
‘ ’ 89. If it is necessary to ex press the idea which hou se or ' ‘ ’ mm naB B what hou se , etc . , this is co only indicated by O , as B1 . ' ' ' ' BaBO MT. no Ms BB B B JI B (in which hou se did you live) : m o B ' ' ' ns BymBs BB nanB a To (to which girl did you give this); m o e ' '
B i e B B a Be B Ti . BaMT. o J p B n ac (which field belongs to you), etc .
LE SSON Xll
THE PRO NOUN ( commuam
' ' ' B T BOTo oe BO To aB 90. Th e regular relative is O o pBB , p , p
who which what and it is declined like an ordinary hard , , P R O N O U N S n
BTO ma adj ective (cf . Note th at y be u sed correctly as a
' ' ' ‘ as B o Ji e I TO B BB wm. Bo Ji e relative after n e n t e r noun s , , n or ,
' ' Th e B0 B KO TO p oe B BB nBJn . (the field which I saw) . pronoun , ' ' m n m . Bo e BO B rarely u sed in the o , is frequently e ployed in , ,
B B R O th e other cases as a rel ative . It i s declined : O (neut . B)
' ' ' ’ ' e B r B0 B . BO B: . KO CM L . Bo ero; Bo My ; acc . o e o, (neut ) instr ; prep
' ' ' ' ' ' '
' B B Boe B . Bo B 0 KO E M L ; fern . Bo ; Boe ; ace. ico ro ; Bo eB ; o ; pl ;
' ’ ' ' ' ' ' ‘ x B KO B x B x o m ; KO H M b ; ace. KO K X B, o B ; instr . BO BM ; prep . 0 .
a ma . It is incorrect to u se BTO as a rel tive , referring to sc ' m BO TO B B and fem . nouns . In su ch cases , the p roper for of p mu st alway s be employed . qTO m u s t be u sed as a relat '
- a m BT O BTo . ive fter pronoun s co pounded with , as To , etc ' ‘ ’ t qT B Mai o i To om . O i s the u sual conj unction that , as ny , I I T a T am . (I think that he will be there) . O appe rs ' ' ' also in the ex pressions B oq y (why) ; O r Ber o (why) ; O TT O TO I z BT o (becau se) . Th e diff erence between B O BeMy (why on I wh at ground) and O TBer o (wh y z from what c au se) i s well I ' m T z arked . hu s O r Ber o BB 6 0 BB B B (why from what cau se ' ' ' are you ill); B oq y BB B To crcasa Ji B (why did you say
a — n a Th th t o wh t ground) . e an swer to them both may be ' th e mm T expressed by co on BO O My BTO (becau se) , mu ch more ' ' O TT O TO ‘I T ' z u sual than O . 3 aq15 M 1. also means why with wh at ' ' ' Obj ect; sa MT. BB B e cns Ji aJi B a Tor o (why did you not do th i sz wh at h a pu rpose d you in not doing this) . Th e answer ' '
saTs MT. BTO 6 B i s followed by the infin . or the pret . tense , ' ' ' aTis B ' as s MT. BTO 6 B B ac i. B e BB a T. (so th at I should not ' I ou z b ecau se see y I did not wish to see you) . I TO 6 B alw ays m ‘ ’ ean s in order that , followed by the infin . or pret . ; never by the present or futu re .
' Note that BO To pB B is also an interrogative in such
' ' ' a BO To B B Baez. a phr ses , as p (wh t time i s it); BO TO poe cer o nB B ' ' BB CBO a - a (wh t to day is the d te) . Th e in ter r . BaBO B i s ,
i n ter r a generally u sed as the . ttributive . P R O N O U N S
' ' E TO i s the prope r relative after B BBTO (nobody); ”0
To m m (so ebody); or any pronoun co pounded with BTO , as ' ' ' ' B e 6 BJi o B BB r E T - o O , O Mom 6 B MH B a To cxasa Ti . (there was not anyone who could tell me that) . As indicated ju st ' above , the same principle applies to HTO is also u sed
' ' ' ‘ ’ BT meB B B e B B's TO T‘b to denote the one who , as O a , I I B eB B ’ B e BH a CT b (he who has not seen me, does not know me) .
RT w TO T‘B In this case , O mu st always be follo ed by Th ’ h (that one) . e u sual method of ex pressing the idea w o
’ m 6 B - BB ever , whatever , no atter who, or what , i s to add
BT T to O and B O , which mu st in this case always be followed " ' B B r by the preterite , as BTO 6 B MHB B B TO op J i . (no matter
' who might tell me); ‘I ’I ‘ O 6 B BB B B crcasa l i B (no matte r what ' ‘ you say to me); Mupi . BO I TO 6 B TO B B CTa Bo (peace no matter what it costs= at any price); E TO 6B To BB ' (whoever it may be) ; ‘I TO 6 B To B B 6 B Ji o (whateve r it may
H ' be) . Note that H in su ch phrases is n o t a negative , bu t
‘ ’ n a pu re indefinite particle . Whoever not is tran slated by o
' ' ' ' ’ B e n B e 3 B aJr B e 1 0 6 B T1. , as o 1. ero , e MO DK T L ero B (whoever ' has not known him cannot love h im); BTo - BT0 i s commonly ' ‘ ’ I I I a fl X'L u sed to indicate some others , as KTO B a JI O A , ' xT B a BT M 6 B Ji w o a O o 1 . (some on horses [dra n by horses] , some in motors) .
‘I TO Th e suffix me; is often added to BTO , ,
' ‘ ’ ‘ ’ B K x B z Be , a o , in a resumptive sen se wh o then or who now , '
- as BTo B e 6mm. anaer. cero nB B (I wonder who was here to ' - day); BT o xce Cl i y qa nocr. (now I wonder what has happened) . ' ‘ ’ ‘ ’ ' BTomi . s n aTB qTO JK B mean s well , then , what of it ; note n ' ' ? oq mre (what i s to be done ) Similarly O TBer o u i re, B y (why ' O Tti er o indeed , why then) , are ve ry u sual in conversation .
‘ ’ ‘ ’
e . S m m ar alone has the sen se of not at all , certainly o eti es
7 6 P R O N O U N S
Voca bu lary (Cont )
' B O BB i o p I will believe (d at . ) '
BO B a BBBO - C i . p pleased (dat . ) ' B op B nom. order ' B oq y why '
f H pesn ne B T f. President ' B pO CTy nB Ji aC B she took cold
a e p n g lad (short adj . ) ' peBMaTB s Mi . rheumatism
cnfinan a did ' C B MB aTB trBB B sympathetic '
cx asa Ti . to say , tell ' TaBo B such (see below) ' p aBBB roI BiB manager ' ' x o BeT i . wishes I n o 6 B in order th at (with pret . of verb)
n o matter wh at something they drove
Ex ercise 1 2 I I I
' TO TB m . T B B BB B B B J1 B e B1 : B o B ab BO Ti . o B . n , KO O p y p n I I I I I m T H c r B ‘ is B Ba aB M B B e a CBM aTB q B a. To I TO n y , KO O p n I I I I I I ‘ (KOTO poe) MB BB a B q pa Be qepO Mi . H p K H aAJI eSKH T B m ay I I I u Moer o aBJi B r K T B B H BCT' 0 1 10 11 B ' B e p omaro , O O p XC B 0 ac i . 1 . n I I I I I I I e BH ‘ ‘ ? p B. O T I C I O Ba B1 a ep y r a 6 0 11 1. B a O B a BpO CTynB I I I I I I
1i aer. n Te B BM T 3 M1 . I M a T B Bi . y Moe Ma p pe a B . q e y a ns y I I I I
’ ‘ x a ' II T M ‘IT B s na ‘I I O - To ‘I TO Bac i . B e O O y O Cn m. , I I I I m B B B H II I B s ‘ e e B O B pa BB O C . Hoq y BB B e p H JI H K0 M B l I I I I ? ’ pa I I O TO My BTO B 3 a H H T L . SI Bcerna p ant . Bacr. I I I I B T B ’ - B B C B I I B a . y H aC b B BBO TO B e 6 1.ui o. AMepB a Bi pe3 I I I I I I
‘ ‘ t e H ’ ' ‘ I TO n T b x o q i. MB pa Bo I I O 6 B To B B CTa JI O . P R O N O U N S 7 7
' ' ' B a BB 111 1 1 1. B B eBaaa nB , B m . B e B O Bs pi o . E TO eB B e
' ' ' ' ' ' e 1 10 B T1. B B x aB B e Mo ateT i . e 1 6 O is B Bo y Ji B Bs, BTO B a
' ' ' ' B Ba e SI x oq - aBTO Mo6 B J1 1s, E TO 1 . p TB. y BaMT. BT o To cx asa T B .
' ' ' ' ' ' ‘ ’ ‘ I TO a To Taao e H e 3 B a 1 o 11 0 B Mai o ‘I I O B . , ny a y a s ' ' ' ' ' ? ' B aBTO M B J1 1s npa ira. H a Ba o MT. o6 BB s x aBB H a OO JI L II I O M L .
' '
11 1 .B 0 B Note that 6 0 , short form 6 o J1 em. (sick; ill) is m ' followed by the in stru ental of the disease . Note that BT O
‘ ’ _ To something , in a definite sense (see next lesson) . Th e ' ' ‘ ’ ‘I T TO TaBo e expression : O B what is this such a thing , simply
‘ ’ mean s wh at i s this . It is the most common phrase in the langu age . It i s not always necessary to express the pronoun in the ' ' e B a 1 o B B N present tense , as B 3 , for B e 3 a 10 . ote that with mm .
' B e - 6 B1 1 0 (there is not), and (there was not) , the subj ect of the
'
’ B B Bor o H BT b a sez. verb mu st be in the genitive , as n (there is no ' ' ’
- body here) ; B mcor o B e 6 1.ui o no ma (there was nobody at
home) , etc . (see below ,
LE SSON Xlll
THE. PRON O UN (CONCLUDE D) DEFlN lTE AN D lN DEFlN ITE PRONOUNS
' ' caM 'B ca Mo ca Ma 92 . Th e definite pronouns are , , (self) ,
'
B a M . om . am as B cam . (I myself) , m . ; c a (I myself) , f ; c ,
' ' '
O Mo m Bec1 . ca Ma O B ca (he hi self , she herself , it itself) ; , ,
’ ' ' B Ba m B B BCB BiB Bce, BC (all , every) , syn . of n , , which are
declined like the h ard and soft adj ective respectively . Note
' '
a r o B an d o B m . N m l lso npy (other) , n (one) under u era s , Lesson XI V SlN C U LAR N P R O N O U N S
I caMor o caMBI I caMB M I . T. ca MO B (ca M0 10 ) I ' P . ca M om . ca MO B
BCI O
PLURAL
' ' ’ ’ ’ ' O K H r m. r a One another is A L npy s , npy npy declined as follows like the short adj ective
SIN G U LAR
' ' ' ' APYF B npy r a O AH H b npy r z. ' ' '
' npy r r. npy r a onB m . npy r or o ' ' ’ ADV" : AP) r y onB m . npy TO My ' ’ ADYN : npy r a npy r or o ' ' ' ' ' ' npy r i . C b npy r om. onB m . C1 . npy r BM i . ' ' ' l ‘ o B 0 AW”: 0 APy b n m . npy TO Mq, P R O N O U N S 7 9
PLURAL
' ' ' ' f o q B 1 1 1 0 6 B M 1. r r For example , MB npy i. npy a (we love one ' ' ' another ve ry mu ch); MB B pB 6 B J1 B npy r i. CT. np y TO MT. (we '
' a Z r 1. ra mm m rrived together) . , Ipy npy is the co on for , and ' ' ' not O nB B i . npy r s.
Cam . may be u sed either before or after its noun : om.
' ' ' B H B cam . (he himself) , but O a M caMO My cx asa n a (she told
) aM ce B me this myself . C i . 6 is a double reflexive , as B
' ' u B J BB B r cam . ce6B By u . y (I bought the book for mv self) .
' ' m Mo 6 Note the idio ca co o 10 (by itself) . CaMi . mu st not be
' M confu sed with ca B B (the very same , or the same) , as cam .
' ' ' m TO ’ BeBO Bis m. (the man hi self) , bu t T L DKC ca MB B BCBO Bs m.
' ' ' ' (the very same man ) ; B1 . ca MO M i. Be B TpB nepe BB B (in the ' ' a B ca M O B e B very centre of the vill ge) , bu t 1 . n pe Bs (in the ' As 6 7 ca MBB mm village itself) . noted in § , i s the co on particle u sed to indicate the superlative of adj ectives .
‘ ’ B er. O M Bec i . mean s the whole , as e n i . (the whole hou se) ; BC10 1 1 q (the whole night) accu s . of time ; Bee r.
' BCB al l MB C B BT. (the whole month) ; MB ( of u s we all) etc . m m ‘ There are a nu ber of idio s with this pronoun , as Bee
' ' ' ' ' m Be r x o o m ro Be 1 p aBB o (it i s all the sa e) ; e o p a , e ro J1y BB a h i To (I wish you well , or t e best luck , l t . be st of all) .
’ ' ' ‘ ’ ‘ Be is T Th e gen . E GC I O mean s in all , as ero Tp n M C a (three
Bee mm places in all) . Note that the neuter i s very co only ' as Be u sed in the sense of Bcer na (always) , BB e 0 Tom . me 80 P R O N O U N S
' ‘ (you are always at the same thing) ; om . Bce r oaopB r i. (he
r. m i s always [continu ally] talking) . Bee u st be carefully disting uished by mean s of the soft sig n at the end , from
1. BBCT. (weig ht) , pronounced nearly the same . Bec mu st
' ‘ ’ K fl never be u sed for every , which is expressed by a JKAH
' ' or BCB Bi B ; Beci . nea r. (all day) ; bu t Ka i a B neB 1 . (eve ry day) .
' Th e : o B B 's 93 . indefinite pronoun s are as follow s n , ' ' o B o O B a a m a XIV n , n (one , a cert in one) , see nu er ls , Lesson ; ' ' ' ' ' B B O B B B o e B B a B a m r o B ro e , , ( nother , any a one) ; npy , npy , ' ' ' ' ' r B a H B KIH B rc B B KO T O LWI B 1; npy a ( nother) ; , s oe, B s x a , H D , ' ' ' BO To oe B B BO To aB a B s icoer o p , p (a cert in one) ; B B BTO , gen . ,
' ' '
. B x oeM Bo e dat is y , (some one); B B BTO (something) indecl . ;
' KTO m - (so e one) definite and Bo e BTO (something ) def . , declined
' ' ' ' ' ' ' : - B B e- B m Bo e- B Bo e regularly respectively Ko e oro , o o y , ero , ' ' ' ' BeM B B KT O B B B BT O y , etc . ; (no one) , gen . B B or o , etc . ;
' ' B BBer en B (nothing ) , gen , o etc . ; B B KaBo B (no one) , g . B ' ' '
Baico r o . B BBe B B q er o , etc ; (belong ing to no one) , gen . ,
' ‘ ’ BeB nT o- B B b m like , the interrogative whose ; 6 y n , (so ebody ' '
- . en . B r BT 0 or other) , indef , g o o etc . ; To (a certain '
- - . B To . BTo B B 6 b m one) , gen or d etc ; y n , (so ething or other) ' ' B r - indef . , gen . e o BTo To (something) def . , gen .
' ' ' ' ' ' B - To KaBo B - B B 6 B B x r - B B x Bo B - B B 6 0 ero ; y n , (gen . a o o B 6 yn ) , a , ' ' ' Bax o r o- BB 6 O BaBo B - Baxor0 - To m and To , (gen . ) , all eaning ' ‘ ’ ' ' m - - - q B B 6 B q BB 6 0 Be B en . so eone or other ; y n , , To (g
‘ ’ in each case meaning belong ing to someone or other
Note th at the above pronouns are chiefly compounded ' with the prefix B is x oe B B and with the suffixes ' - 11 B - . 6 0 and TO .
' '
. BqTo a 94 In the case of B BBT O , the form B is r rely
‘ mom BTO C1 . B M B u sed in the . and acc . , as H (what is with
' ' h im 7 . a BT O wh t is the matter with h im); B BBer o , an d not B B ; P R O N O U N S 3 1
' ' '
a To B q r o (that is nothing n o matte r) . Both B BBTO an d ' '
' B BBTO a n e . B B BTO B e lways require a g verb , as I I p H II I gJI L
' ' (nobody h as [n o t] come) ; B B B BO TO B e BB nwi T. (I saw ' m B B B T nobody) . Note the idio s O O B sTT. (there is nobody) ;
' ' ) ' B B BO TO B e BBna T T. (there is nobody to be seen ; B BqTo B e '
C x TT. BB a (there is nothing to be he ard) , etc .
' ' When B BB To and B B qTO are u sed with a preposition ,
the preposition i s inserted between the B B and the pronoun as , '
’ B B B CT. KBM L B BT. BO My (to no one) ; (with no one) , in ste ad of ' ’ B BB M C T. H H KBM B m T. B O y ; , for s which would be quite incorrect . ' m B BT O Si ilarly one says B 3 a (for nothing ) , an d n o t 3 a ' n B BBT O . This i s a inv ariable rule . Note the idioms R am.
' ’ ' 6 y nT0 B B BT. BBMT. B e OH Ba JI O (as if nothing h ad occu r red) ;
' ' B B e BT. BeMT. B e 6 B a Ji o (not at all) . Note that B B BaBO B
a (no , of no sort) is declined like the ordin ry adj ective in
'
- 0 B 48. , §
Th e p refix B e may be u sed before any case of E TO or m n om . are n o except the , and the words thu s for ed followed ' ' i nfin B e Ber o s BaT T. by the . as n (there i s nothing to be done ; ' ' B eB M CBaaa Ti . ( lit , to do); O y there is no one to tell it to);
'
’ B e CT. Kb M b rO Bop B Ti . (there is no one to tal k with) ; H e 0
'
a T 1 . new . o6 cymn (there is nothing to discu ss) , etc . These ' forms mu st on no account be confu sed with B B BTO (some
' ar m e one BB BT O (something) , which e u sed al ost xclu sively ) , ‘ m m . C f r in the no inative In fact , the u su al x pressions o so e ' ’ ‘ ’ BTo - TO m one and something are (so eone) , not to be con
' ' fu sed with the more indefinite BT0 - B B6 y n1 . (someone or
' '
- - other I do not know who) ; BTo To (something) ; BT o B B 6 y n1.
‘ ’ (something or other I do not know what) . Some in the ' B B BO T o B B adj ectiv al sen se is p , declined like the regular hard
' a a adj ective but B is r i B a cert in one , cert in , 3 2 P R O N O U N S
' ' - B 6 0 BTo- Jm6 o m 94. KTO JT , are even ore indefinite th an ' ' ' ‘ ’ ‘ - B B 6 1. m ll xT0 BTo y n and ean anyone at a , any
’ thing at all .
' ' ' ' ' - - - o B B . x o B B B B B M e K TO , gen oro , dat . o o y , etc . , m an s ' ' ‘ ’ B B BJi B - r a few people , as B n T. BO Bo o (I saw one or two
' ’ ’ B B - BTO people) . Similarly o mean s a little , in the sense of
' ' ' ‘ ’ - a thing or two ; om. cx asa m. MB is Bo e qTo 0 6 1 . a TO MT. (he ' ' ' B - O B told me a thing or two abou t it) . Ko BaB , gen . x o B
' ' ‘ ’ ‘ ‘ o an 11 1 0 0 B x aB r o, means a few d 6 , mentioned above , anyone
’ at all , like the Germ. d e r e r s t e B e s t e .
SYNTAX OF THE PRON OUNS
mm 96 . Note that the co on people sometimes su bstitu te ' ' ' ' is Ji o TBoe s Ji o s Ji o m aff f Moe n , n , e r o n ( y air , thy af ai r , his ' ~ ff MO O s n B e 6 o a air) , etc . for all the personal pronoun s ; as ni o ' ' 2 e r a Toe (I am not rich) B B 6 ora TT.. A most cu riou s
m B m. 6 aTT. a m. 6 aTT. idio i s au p , B u p (ou r brother , you r brother) , ' ‘ ’
a . a meM etc . , lso u sed in the sense of I , thou , he , etc , as B y
' ' ' a T M 6 p Ty a o B o nsBo T. (this serves you right ; lit . this is to T m you r brother according to the hese idio s are , how ”
ar m . T ever , f fro elegant hey correspond to the slangy you rs E truly in nglish , for I , myself , etc .
’ ’ 97 . It has already been pointed ou t that BB the plu ral you , , is u sed in the polite form for ’you ’ in the singular and with it
’ mu st ag ree the verb and adj ective , as BB OO JI B HH (yo u are
' ' B c s n aJi B a T ill) ; B n o (pl . verb) (you did this) . Servants and ' ‘ ’ O B B fem 11 15 the lower classes say , . 0 , they (masc . and
' ' ' ‘ ’ O B T. O H a O B B B B 1 instead of , he , she , as p 6 B 1 B om. BpB ' ‘ ’ ‘ ’ 6 B Ji T. they arrived , for he arrived . MB (we) is similarly
’ ' u sed for B (I) by roy al person ages : MB BO DR IC I O M B BO C TB TO
(We , by the g race of God) , and also as in E ng lish by editors
3 4 P R O N O U N S
’ 1 00 H B KT O (a certain one) is u sed only in the nomi
’ ‘ a m E T - T O O e . B e oblique c ses being taken fro , i . , or d ' ’ B B BO To B B KaKO fl - T Instead of p , O i s u sed in ordinary
' ' s b u ma : BT. B B BO To O MT. a CTBs p e s ch , t one y say p B p (in a
' ' certain kingdom) ; BT. B B BO Top O MT. r ocyna pCTBs (in a certain
m . e pire) , etc
Indefinite pronoun s (whoever , whatever) are u sed not only
- - T. Ji B 6 o t 6 y , as shown above , bu t also with verbs as wi h n ,
' ' ' '
‘ O B o E TO 6 B B B 6 BJI T. B a 6 B B I TO B B B a Ji , , yn B BaBo B ’ ' KaKO I/I B B B a as B B e er a or popularly already indicated . ,
‘ ’ Neither one nor the other i s expressed by B B T OT ' L
' r B B B npy o .
Th e student mu st re ad over c arefully the above p ara
as m g raphs , all the p ronouns therein entioned are not repeated in the following v oc abulary .
Vocabu lar y
balcony , veranda it was
he w as to be
to see (in g eneral)
she saw to see
tog ether inj u riou s
every , e ach
at home ( ad v . ) other to live
to - morrow knows P R O N O U N S 85
Vocabu lary (Cont )
becau se of (g en . ) other every some one
bought (pl . ) m m uch , any (foll . by g en . )
we can
can (3d p . sing . )
' npyr o B neither the one nor the other
e night (f m . ) package
n conce rni g , about oneself for oneself
f m . sat ( e . sing )
heard (masc . sing .) snow
slept (masc . sing . )
well (ad v . ) they wish m servant , an centre
' ' '
O m. MBT. caM O My CBa3 a JxT , BT O B e Mo aceTT. 6BT T. CT.
' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' M ca MB ce6 1s B B B Ji BT a. B B Bu B T B a MB aa p y y . S To Ta xce
' ' ' ' ' ’ ’ B O H B Ta m KB B ra BO To B ' ca Ma ( n a e) , py i o BH JIJSJI L y BaCT. ' ’ ' '
' m. B B BeTT. BT. ca MO M L e B T s q a . r o o a p O B p p n . SI BeC T.
' ' ' ' ' i SI B e C B a Ji 1 eB T. C B i s i T. o Ma. T. E GIO 11 0 1 5 n n n . SI Bu x y ero ' ' ’ ’ ’ ' ' B B eB B C B Bi B ‘I CJI O BB K'L BH a ’ B a iBnB n . B eT b TO S To B B o e
' ' ' ' '
s Ji o SI Bo e- BTO a x a nT. O TT. B B O B O B n . ero ony Ba mer o ' ' '
’ ‘ ’ ‘ - 6 a Ta. q l d S I O H B BT O B e 3 B a eTT T s p , n om. Te 86 P R O N O U N S
' ' ' ' ’ ' ' - B e b . HTo TO CBaaa Ji T. . eB B e i s l i aTT. a TO To p n . O B a BB ns
' ' ' ' '
- Ji a B T o BT. o MB C Boe B ceCT B B o B e 3 B e B or d n p , a TT. oro .
' ' ' ' ' eB B eCTT. BTo - T J1 B Ho a BTe y M o n BacT.. n a TO TT. BaBe TT. ' ' ' ' ' ' B a eM BeB BB B B o B B BO M - 11 B o r m y O y , y 6 npy o My . SI TO BopB Ji T. ’ ’ B KBM’ T C T. H H MH B B CT. b npy B MT . KTO TaMT ? TaMT. B B
' ’ ' ' ’ t B H BT B B B B BO TO H B B r B B oro o o e ana TT.. I TO
' ' ’ ' ' ? is Ji aTb H e qer o BJI aTb . SI BB ia . Bac B n A n T , orna BB ro
' ’ ' ' '
' - Bo B BB C L BBMT. B a 6 a11 Bo B15 . SI 3 B aJ1 T. SI p To ero . BB
' T. BaCT. CT. KBM B To q a B 0 B e B a p , 3 a i o CT. BBMT.. H 1;
O T B B T BeB T. B B opB B B B O Bp e n B . S TO Mo xceTT. ni s lxaTT. Ba m '
B T BB B Ji B ? SI B j i T. B B - B r SI C n nB . KO O a a O o o . BBx a T. ' ' ' ' '
- T MB CT. Ba B B e Mo Bo e BTO B o B o Bony B TO O . M BceMT. B BT T. ' ' ' C M aM HTb x o mo BMB CTB, B 0 T. B B T. B T. DIC p o . O BB B e x o
' ' ’ ' H a I H aX’L BB TB TT. BaCT. BB nBT T. TaMT.. y J u TO BO B 1;
' ' ' '
b K B B B B B 6 B11 T. TaMT MB T B C KO l I O Be O B T , orna . O O Bi one C B ' ' ' ' ' ‘ - H B T TT. B B TO B nB TT. no Ma BaT aa C B s r a . O npy B e Mo I I I I I I B B BT o T. CBas nT. B we TT. B aCT. BB nBTB . O n T. no p a M 1. a To .
Note th at du ration of time is ex pre ssed by the accu s
‘ ’ ‘
all n m . thu s BC B 1 1 q the night in the o , bu t all night ,
‘ ’ m ‘I b with the sense of du rin g u st be BC i o H O , as above .
ALPHABETICAL LIST OF THE DE MONSTRATIVE AN D lN DE FlN lTE PRONOUNS
1. BCB BC B all Bec , , , whole
' ' ' B Bo BC B BaB a BCB BiB , BC e, e ch , every
' ' ' T B ro e r a B npy o , npy , npy other
' npe . npy r a e ach ot her ' ’ ' B a B B i i o B H H O e , B other I , I I i B Ba i x oe Ba Bc aB a Ba Ta , n , n e ch , every I I I ? I CZI KO BO BaBO Ba B a BaBO BO B , e , wh t sort of
' ‘ m Af ter M l l O l O (many) neu te r sing u lar , verb u st ,
be in the sing ul ar ; C unn T1 . sits . P R O N O U N S 87
' ' ' ? e KaBa B Bax o B , Bax o , which
' BaBo B- JIB 6 O ' ' some one or othe r BaBo B - B B 6y n1. ’ - BaBo B To someone (more def . ) '
- - Bo e BTO Bo e BOT . m d cf. ( O , etc ) so eone ( ) ' ' ' ' - - m Bo e BTO , Bo e qero so ething I I I
BO To BB B BoTo aB . p , OTO poe , p who , which ( rel ) I I
B . B0 B , Bo e , BO who , which (rel ) I I in r r te . BTO , (Boro BO My etc . ) who ( ) I - m BT o To so eone (def . )
I BTO - Ji B 6 0 I someone or other Br o- H n 6y n I I o B BT. Bo O B a n , on n a certain one I I o B r T a a nB T. npy o o e ch other , one nother I I I m o BBB , 0 B oe, 0 H M sa e (obsolescent)
I I B eBor o B eBO My no one (oblique c ases only) I I B eqero B eq y nothing (oblique cases only) I I B BBT O (B BBO TO no one I I H K‘I T O (B BBer o ) nothing I I B 1.B To B O pB , B1.BO Topoe I , o m HB KO TO Daa so e , certain I I I B1.B B 1 , B 1.Boe B 1.BaB certain I , I H 5 111 0 (mflects BO TO - T o KO I , - - m My To, from BTO To) so eone ’
B B CBO JTB BO some (toll . by gen . of the thin g ) ' B B BTO something (indecl . )
' ’ aMT c M c , a oe, ca Ma self
' ' ' ca B c M m n MB , a oe, ca MaB sa e ; a d u sed to denote su perlatives I eB i c , C e, cm this (almost obs . ) I I I TaBO B o e TaBa B , TaB , such
T TT To Ta a O , , th t (yonder) I I I To ' - - e Ta - e a am T s ace, To >B , TB th t s e
B B ‘ B ? C , l b e , BB whose 88 P R O N O U N S
t{ en - 1m 6 0 whose (very i ndefin i te) qen - H n oy Ab ' qe n - To whose? (less indefinite)
‘ ’ ‘n o new ? ( ) what u sed also as con j . that ' trro- Jm ti o something or other t - rro maoy 11 1 , ' q'r T o o something (more def . ) ' ax n once w as o , , what a person ! ’ ’ ' x n ar a e ar x sr ar a o , a o , a a such a one ' ‘ ’ ar m a T am , o, this , and the nearer that
LE SSO N XlV
THE N U ME RALS
' ’ ’ CAR DINALS (Kon n qecr aen n u a n men a q n cm m s m )
' ' ' ' o n 's o n a n B n L zm , gr , on o A s a nnaT ' (pass in counting only) Ta H a gmaTb I
s a as f. ne H n , A , m ( ) w p aJma ' Tp n U SI TH a AnaTb ’ ' qem pe mecr n a grna'rb ' n a r s ceMH a Anar' b ' mecr' b BoceMH a Ana'rb ' CC MI : ACBH T H a AnaTB ' ' Bo ceMb Ana gna'rb ’ Ae n ar b ' AC C SI TB
' onn n anna'rb
Note that the accent i s n o t on m agma“ , in th e ' ' m o n n a ar b n w n a rr, rt . nu erals n nn (eleven) , and e p gma (fou een)
be re From 1 5 to 1 9, the numeral lose s its soft sign fo
m agma s . T H E NU ME RAL S 3 9
' ’ AB amaTb qem pecr a ' n a r b co n
' mecr b co r 's
'
ceMb co n .
' BoceMb co n
’ neaar n co n ’ m cz qa
' mas m cs mn
(gen . sing . ) I Tpn TH c a l m ecx n I I (pron . n ng ) new p e TH C a m I I ‘ n a n , m ca n . mecr b gecsr T b
m sr (gen . pl . ) (pron . egec m.)
' ' ' mecn s Tu c a n 6000 x ce u b gec m (colloq . ' ' C MB m ca q's 0 ce Mb cm ) 70 C 7 00 ' ' Bo ceMb TH CSI ‘I ’b 8000 ' SI ’ ' ' BO CCML CC T L (colloq . A e Bfi Tb m csrtn 9000 ' A Bo ceMb cm ) 80 ' ' ne csrr' b TH C SI T L ’ ' m m cm . g eaa n o cr o 90 c '
mnm io m . 1 00 ' m mw io u a ' A r H ' ' c o oAn s , As a, Tpn , etc . Tp n mn m io u a 1 1 ' ’ 1 0 , 1 02 , 03 , etc . q em pe mm io u a '
200 11 51 1 1: mm i o n om,
' ' 300 C ro mm i ou om.
‘ fWo i m r ‘ Th e m M e fix e 100. nu erals to inclu sive require the
noun which they qualify to be in the genitive singular , as
' ’ na er u t BE me n mm m A o a (two ables); A m (two wo en) , but ,
if an adj ective is u sed with the noun , the adj ective mu st
be in the geniti ve plu ral , the noun remaining in the gen
' ' i s x b x ' r it ve singu lar , as A a oo in n s c on a (two big tables); 90 T H E NU ME RAL S
' ' as a aca asi x 's me n n usx g p m (two beautiful women) . If the noun itself i s really an adjective it takes the genitive plu ral
' t ' after three , fou r and five , as aa p aoo m x s (two workmen) g ,
and , if a real adj ective i s u sed with it , this is also u sed in
' ' aa cn oco n sxx 's ' the genitive plu ral , as g 6 paooqn x s (two cap able workmen) .
n From five o , the noun qualified mu st be in the gen
' ' ‘ i i n sn a r n s s' 3 ' ' t v e plu ral , as c o o (five tables) ; 11 1 s d og a ma x s
' ' cr on o s 's (five large tables); g as Jae n mmm (two women); ' ' a a acn asi x s' e n n n u t o m g s p m m ( w beau tiful wo en) . When m ever two , three and fou r are co bined with twenty, thirty ,
forty , etc . , the noun i s in the genitive singular , j u st as if
' ' aa ar s aa er g two , three and fou r stood alone , as g gn g o a ' ' - aa ar a r n s s (twenty two tables) , bu t g gn c o o (twenty tables); ' ' n r H n Hu - m gea n o c o Tpn xce m (ninety three wo en) . On the ' n m m other hand , after og , (one) in all genders , the noun u st
- - be in the singular , even when twenty one , thirty one , forty ' ' ' O H H I: r ws n one , etc . , are indicated , thu s A c o (one table); og a
' ' , m H o u m me n n maa (one wo an); og g (one child) , and also ' ' ' ' g aa gnar' a ogn n 's cr ows (twenty - one tables) ; r pn gnar a og n a ’ ' ' ' me n mn n a (thirty - one women); co poa's og n o gnr sr (forty one children) , etc .
Sometimes in the literary style , if an adjective comes between the numeral and the noun , the adjective may be in the nominati ve plural instead of the genitive plu ral , as g as
' ' ' ' x c asix ' s aoqan as a acn an n s aom pa n s g , or g p g (two pretty
' ' ' ' aa oog s mn x 's o Ma aa am n little g irls); g g , or g oog i e go a
‘ afle (two large hou ses) . Thi s doe s not ct the genitive of the qualified noun which mu st follow the ru le gi ven above .
Th e student mu st learn the numeral s by heart , paying especial attention to the accent .
92 P R O N O U N S
Ex ercise 1 4
' ' ' ' ' ? Gxo n s ao y Bacs Kn n r s y mesm Tpn ma g en s aia Ki m
' ' ' , ' K M n r n n n n r b Gon b mn x s . O y a an exca Ts Gona w i a m m
' ' ' ' ' ra ? n s n n n a nema r s m n T n O p g oe ma ep , y x or o pon ecr s
' ' ' ' ' ' sx' a r n x mm r ? Ta m e ge c r gpy s s . Gao g s ao Bu aa gs mu rog e n
' ' ' ' ' 91 an sg s H a na s Tu cn qn m n é n a me ' g y n og e , em oo aar ou o
' ' ' ' ' en or Tar q eg as a 6 n n . y G a o o a oga H H agnar s m cs ms n a s a
' ' ' ' ' ' co Ts T a ar s O H H s o Juxa s as o Ho Ms r o o n a p gn g g p g p gs , s
' ’ ' ’ ' ' gpy r o Ms qem pn agna'r s Tu csrqs g as em n a r s gecs rs qem p e
’ ' ' ' ' ' ' g o m apa n go ma y H ero Tpn cr a Tsi cs qs co poas n srr s g o s
' ' ' ' a r om n q en s T z napo s . Ho y o s o oon c aopo as . Caon s ao
' ' ' ' ' ' ? o n as o Juxa s O JmcH o 6m . aa on sr H O T n s py ge g p JI g py , e e p ' ' ' ' ' ' a a e Msr s mm n o rir n T n n n or om qr o sn o p o p pyo , y n a
' ' ' ' ' ' ' s a pyoJm me H me q s onga . 51 an gs ns g a er oga Tp n cr y x a
' ' ' an n srr s aa an me n n me r s n n m r x q u pe goc , p g a c y n n s ma ' ' ' ' ' sn a ro a' o n a ao an n r as 6 n 6 11 i0 T e as H m ma n s . H e c s a ero
' ' ' ' ' I I I ecTs. Tu cs qs mecr s co Ts mecr s ecn m mecr s ro poga. g ' ' ' ' ' ' n n s Mag g i fls a To m csrq o q s p g o n po sn ocn T . o a Tsi ' ' ' ' ' ' n a u m mn s u g o aa a'rs Jxoma e n a s ms . Bs H a me o o g gn g , org a
' ' ' ' ' r o s H a s mo n or e ns (i sms as Her por pa gs . Bs p og en s g ep
' ' ' ' ' ' o cr a r qn o a n s r s r ei-r xca r s co pox s cooa as . Bs g Ms go o p s
' ’ ' ' ' s s c r n sr e H ers as Ka sra n s ? Ko meas . Cao n ao y Bac e o g g p ' ' ' ' ’ mea a To x s ao n an . n ce ms eca r s no H emn o ro; y pyoge , g
I ' I l ls CR B.
It i s u sual to insert the possessive construction between
cao g s ao and the word it qualifies ; cao g a ao y H s mneas I o ? co ug a r s (how many sold i ers have the Germans )
' ‘ ’ : a ms r s Note that there is a verb to have , bu t it is
rarely u sed to denote direct possession of a concrete object .
' ' ' I sa a Ms Ts 0 6 as as g o sxs H e t i s , however , correct to y c a
' x opomo to have (keep) dog s in the hou se is not a good
thing . 93 LE SSO N XV
SIO N O F N UM RALS ARD N DE CLE N E . C I ALS
Th e m a 102 , nu er ls one , two , three and fou r inflect as follows
Fem.
I ogn a I 0 g n o n I O gH o n
' O gH y
I I O gH o n (ogH o I O ) ' Ogn o n
R A L
an Masc . d Neut . g enders I g aa new pe \
a x s q e G . g y er u p x s
D a s . g y M qem pe Ms
g as q si p e x s A . I g aa s en t pe ' I " a M sr f g y qem p s mn
O " g ay x s q em p ex s 94 N U M E R A L S
Six e 103 . , seven , ight and ten inflect like five , as follows :
f a a su fers contr ction , as follows
'
N . ao cems
'
G . aocs mn
' D s m . aoc s
’
A . ao cems
'
I . aocems ro
'
P . aoc ama
m m 104, Fro eleven to nineteen inclu sive , the nu erals
m e inflect as follows : bearing in ind , how ver , that the accent m is immovable , i . e . , it follows the accent of the no inative
fem in each case . Thi s is the declension of the soft . (see
m a above , 3 5 go ag ) .
' ' ' ogn H H agnaTa Ta a gnar a qem p n agnar a ' ' ’ 0 g n 1m agna'rn Tpn n a gna'rn aem p u ag nar a ' ' ’ og n H H agnaTn Tp n n a g na'rn aem p n agnar a ' ' ' oga n n agna'rs T p n n a gnar s q em p n agna'rs
' ' ' oga H H agnaT b ro Tpa aa gnar s ro qem p n ag nar s ro ' ' ' O g H H H agna'r n T pnn a g ua'ra qem pn ag nar a
1 05 Th e m a , n u er ls twenty , thirty , N , fifty , sixty , T seventy an d eig hty follow the paradigm of fifty . hu s ,
96 N U M E R A L S
Th e h m a cr o | 08, ot er co bin tions with (hund red)
‘ ’ after the p aradigm of five hundred ;
' H H T b C O T 'b
' H H T H CO T’b
' H R TH c r ams
'
' U H TI : Qo T b
' ' I I SI T b l O CTa MH
' I I SI TH cr ax s
‘ ’ T a t a 1 09, hou s nd inflec s as regular feminine noun
I TH Cfl qa Tw o , three and fou r thou sand i n flect TH CSI ‘I H I I a as as m cn qn a x s r u cs ms regul rly , g , g y , ‘ TH CSI I B I I I a Ms W a a s a x s r m a n a g y c , g y c s , g y m C fl‘I y I I I MFI r s: ca qamn a x srq x , g y s r u c a s . m ca qs ro
I r u csms
0 ‘ O O ’ O 0 Mmu no H s m i n flects i a I I O. illion l ke a regul r hard I 0 o o e I m mmo a MHJI JI H MHM I i nan i mate masculi ne noun : s , I O a, O Hy , etc .
' o 6 a ( ) a m I l l . Note that both is infl ected fter the odel
aa aa of g and also , like g , requires the qualified nou n in the gen . sing N U M E R A L S 97
' n onr o a ( ) ”2 . Note the inflection of p one and a half and its kindred examples
Masc . Masc . and Fern . I I n onr opa n onr opa cr a 1 50 ' I n ony r opa n ony r opacr a ' n ony r opy nogy r opacr a I I n onr o a n onr o a cr a p , p ' n ony r opu Ms n ony r opacr a ' ' n og y r ops n ony r opacr a
SINGULAR PLURAL ' n m n r a n o n r n N . o by (half a pound) mby ' ' n r n om cn r o as G . 0 11 b y H a b I I n n H r n om H r a Ms D . o yé y y by I I m H H om n r u A . mo by r a by ' n n f H T Ms n om H r a Mr: I . o y by O by ' n n t n r s n om n r a Xs P . o y by by
' ' ' Honr opa is a combination of n ox oan n a ar opo r o (half
’ Th m n n ro man - of the second . ) e co pound o p (half a wine glass) ' is declined like n omby H r a only with the feminine endings .
Th e m 1 1 3 , nu eral s agree with the qualified su bstantive , m adj ective or pronou n in the genitive , dative , in stru ental
' ' ' ’ asa s eaflr ro ux a as and prepositional , as o p g n co su s gepm ' (the bazar of the nine allies) ; a owl s r aMs cs geasrr s ro ' ' mog aMn (I was there with nine people) ; 51 gas x g sos og a H '
H a ar n ace n n aaMs a m . gn m (I g ve bread to eleven wo en) , etc
m m When nu erals occu r co pounded , every part is declin able , bu t the case of the noun depends , as already indicated ,
' ' m a a O H H s ( n r s only on the l a s t n u e r l , as co po s g by ' ' ' - co ox a O H or ( n r a - (forty one pound s) , but p g o py (of forty one ’ ' ' pounds) ; g as cr n r p n g nar a r pn apn mn a (two hundred and ‘ ' ' ' n i rt - a x r s r r x s a u mn s y three arshins) , bu t g y co p agna n r pE p W N U M E R A L S
t - (of two hundred and thir y three arshins) . Note that here the noun is u sed in the g enitive plu ral in accordance with , the rule above g iven 1 00 .
Th e m accu sative of n u erals i s the same , even in the
' m as m case of ani ate nouns , the no inative , but o a n s aa g , g , ' r m p , s er u p e (one , two , three , fou r) , when no othe r numeral
m m ac u s i e z i precedes the , take the ani ate c at v g en tiv e in
m a m T 51 s i for when qu lifying ani ate noun s hu s , gn s og H o ' ' ' r o q r as aa: a x s l ‘ ’b aer u x s Jx n z o or g y , n , pe rog e l saw on e
' ' man men 5: an sg s aa ar a x ; or two , three , fou r , bu t g g g n s g y s
' e n z - Jnog l saw twenty two people .
' ‘ ’ Th e m sen se abou t , so u ch is expressed by o x oao ,
cs followed by the genitive , or by with the accu sative , or ' by placing the nu meral a f t e r the noun : thu s o aoao u nr i
' ' ' geca r n maro as z abou t fifty paces : cs n n r s g ecn r s maro as ;
' ' ma a n n s n m z b ro s r gec a ou t fifty paces , etc .
Ag e is ex pressed in R u ssi an either by the dative of
' Mn s the person and the nominative of the year , as co poas
' ao ceMs Jrsr s (I am forty - eight years old z to me forty - eight years) or by the nominative of the person and the genitive ,
' ' 51 a m ma of the year : copoaa aoc Mn m , to which y be added ' = the phrase o r s pogy (from bi rth of age) .
‘ ’ H ere it should h e noted that the word year is ex
' h T e . . ro s . . . nsr s . pressed by rog , gen ro ga; gen pl gen pl
' go as is regarded as vulgar .
Vocabu lary
BHH O wme
' r oaopn g a they spoke
n r s rogs (g e . pl . as ) year I g aneao far
1 00 N U M E R A L S
Vocabu lary (Cont )
l cocr m m l a ror s ake (p . ) ’ ceno village
' ero ga hither
cs with (in st . ) ' r ea r ps theatre
Qy n r s pound ' x or sr r s they wish I xoay I wish
nea r s cent
mar s pace
1 5
' ' ' ' T n cr a ecr s ecsr r s n x r a H e n cocr aansr p m g g ror s rogs . ’ ' ' ’ SI s i n s on co ox a o n n r n ecar n oma en g p g g n g as aomo n ms .
' ' ' ' ' Bs g aa s aca a n pos x an s aar omoon n eMs oo nse mecr a gecx r n ’ ' ' ' ' ' man s Cao g s ao s r o cr oar s ? 8 r o cr o n r s n s r s a n . pyo e , ' ’ ' ' ' ’ x r s eca aou s eas e s r r ag n n g r s . B ero o coc a er s og n n n agnar s ' ’ ' ' I ' n I r cr o n ( a r a - ? ( pyoge . o r s py s Ma caa as H m I o p xs Dy n r s ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ma en a r en e p s ao ape Msr aomm cr o n r s o xoao copoaa n a ’ ’ ' ’ ' ' r q n s r an r a ne u r oas s o o e go po o . H gsns Bacs cs gay ' ' ' ' ' si e n a o s n 51 a M H s a o Msi Mn m g M . (i sms s r ea r ps cs n a r s io
' ' ' ' ' ’
s a maaMn . O n n n is x aj m o cs aoceMs ro oG g y p ci ga c a aasm . ' ' ' ' ' n r x M O H H H r ma a Ms n JI a e o p s g agna n n o g . Y acs ecr s Ms cr o ' ' ' ' ' '
mecr a sn aao Mu x s . a n r e Ms cr o ecr n n n JI m aomag Ms . ' ' ' ' ' ' ' n n x r sr r s - cr o Jm oas 3 r o can x o O o no o g ap . m m . Mn o ro, ' ' ' ' ' ' a r n Ms eas mo cr o n n as cr n 6 ne n n g n e n o g . y Me g py . l la ' ' ' ' ' ' n M a Ms n r e n x s S T HM b g ay Mcr a Ms 6 s g u s aro g . O s n pis a rs
' ' ' , n a Ma 1m xi Pi e- as H a Ms cs n r i ocr a Mn py6 1m . 11 s 6m mMb ’ ' ' ' ' ' o Ms SI a r u ca q 6 ne n 3 s r cr a as n a meMs g . xo y y py a y ' ' ' ' '
a mK Ms au co aa . s a mxn t ae MJn o . 0 6 a cr on a c n O g y o N U M E R A L S 1m
' ' ' ' ' ' m a n I I onr aoceMH a s op u co M o (co M ao ro ) . opa ro g a g ' ’ ' ' ’
r a ms cs eas . Honr o a cr a con a r s mn n n s cs a n r e na m p g gs . JI ' ' ’ ' H aM'L n oas ( u r a a n ns I O MKH an H a 51 st mens py M ca no D . a ’’ ' ' ' ' r e x s H esn aao Mu x s Jno e n as aon r s n - p g o p . Am e d 1m cego ' ' ' ' ' ' r a III aro as as cr n H M r g s x s o cro g . g . Bs O g o s o o r o p O g s ecr ' ' ' ' a ‘ m e n a g s ao am JUS ’ a r u c m ao ag . C o B s T L . Mu s co po s ao
' ' ' ems m s H a mxa r a as e n c . O ae p ro ga g pe aus , H 0 o s arm s
I a r s r aMs g s Ha g na asrs .
' ‘ ’ ‘ ’ ‘ ’
a . a s m Note that cero , gen of ec all , eans in all , altogether .
‘ ’ ‘ as; m m Th e preposition g eans for in ost senses , bu t for a ' ’ a s x price is always expressed by 3 . Bo cem gec r s i s u su ally ' ’ pronounced ao ceMC 'rs and ce ms gccx r s (seventy) is pronounced
m a cemcr s . Bs (in) takes the te poral ccu sative .
LE SSON XVI
' ' ' OR D INALS (E me n a uncan r en a n sm n opx goq mm )
’ - sr - oe n e pasm, a ,
' ' ' n - a sr - o e Br op o , ,
' ' ' n e r s sr r e r s e r pe r i , r p , p
r n - sr e qe aepm , a , o
' n a r sm
' mecr o n
' ceg s Mo n
' aocs Mo n
' geax r sm
' gecsr m n
' O g H HH agnarsm
' g asn a gnar u n 1 02 N U M E R A. L S
' Tp n n a gnar sm thirteenth ' q er si p n agnarsm fou rteenth ' n x m a gqam n fifteenth ’ mecr n a gnam n sixteenth ' ceMHa gqar sm seventeenth ' aoceM H a gnar s m eighteenth
' g eax r n a g nar sm nineteenth ' gaagna r u n twentieth ’ ' gaa gnar s n e pas m twenty - first ' ’ gaa g nar s ar op o n twenty — second ’ Tpn gnar s m thirtieth
' ’ r p n gnar s n e pau n thirty - first ’ cop ox oao n fortieth ' n ar a geca r u n fiftieth ’ mecr n gecsi r n n sixtieth ' ceMn geca r sm seventieth ' aocs Ma g ecsi r n n eightieth ' g ean n o cr sxn ninetieth ’ co w n hundredth
' g ay x s - co r sxn two- hundredth ' r pEx s - co r u n three - hundredth
' qer u pex s - co r u n fou r - hundredth
ti a r a- com a fiv e - hundredth
' ' mecr a - co m n six - hundredth
' ' ceMn - co m n seven - hundredth
' ' aoca Mn - co r u n eight - hundredth ' ' geas r n - co r sm nine - hundredth ’ TH CSI ‘I HHH thou san d th
' g ay x m cn qn s m ' two - thou san dth g ay 'rsi cs mn u n
’ gecx r n r u CQ Q H u fl ten - thou sandth
' cr or u cn q mm hundred - thou sandth ' M iam io a n s m million th
m4 N U M E R A L S
o I fifteen mi nu tes past twelv e s e r ae r s n e aaro asa a ar s I p Ip ; g gn s as a s e r a aco epr s , or, a n ar I I H a guatrs man y r s twenty minu tes past twelve gaa gnar s M an y r s n e paaro ; gas
H a r l : s as a aa r s gna aco g gna Man . twenty - five minu tes past g aa gnar s mar s M a n y r s n e p aaro; twelve gasaa gnar s s aco as a g aa gnar s n s r s maay r s I I I I half past twelve n onoaa H a s aca ; n onoaa H a me p aaro I I I twenty - fiv e mi nutes to one 6 e3 s g aagnam' n srr a Maay r s s acs ’ ’ twenty minu tes to one 6 e3 s gaagnar a MHH y T'L s acs
' fifteen minutes to one 6 e3 s s e r aepr a s acs
' ' ten minutes to one 6 e3 s g eca r n Man y rs s acs ’ ' five min utes to one 6 e3 s n a r a Man y r s s acs
’ ' one o clock s acs ; og n a s s acs
' ’ two o clock g aa s aca
' ’ abou t two o clock s aca g aa
’ ' three o clock r pn s aca
' ' ’ fou r o clock s er u pe s aca
’ ' five o clock n n r' b s aco as ’ ’ six o clock mecr s s aco as
' ’ seven o clock ceMs s aco as
' ' ’ eight o clock ao ceMs s aco as
' ' ’ nine o clock g e as r a s aco as ’ ' ’ ten o clock ge es r s s aco as
' ’ ’ eleven o clock oga a aagnar s s a coas
x m m x r “ 6 . Note that the appro i ate ti e i s e p es sed by
' ’ ' s s a a placing the numeral after the word aca , co s , as s aca ' ’ ’ g aa (abou t two o clock); s aco as n ar s (abou t five o clock) ; m etc . This may al so be expressed by ean s of the preposi
’ ' m c a a i . tion o aono, govern ng the gen of the nu eral , as o o ' ' ’ ' o xog o aa s g ayx s s aco as (abou t two o clock) , bu t , g aca N U M E R A L S 1 05
I I (abou t two hou rs); o aog o s er si p ex s s aco as (abou t fou r
’ I I I ’ s s a o clock) ; o x on o n r n aco s (abou t five o clock) .
' ’ z a s T Two h ou r s g a aca the s ame as two o clock . w o ' ’ ' l z a C n n a a n h a hou rs an d a h a f g a s aca s o o a o . T e word cy r n ,
em n om . pl . f . , is frequently u sed to indicate a period of ' ’ - s m sr r a - twenty fou r hou rs , as m cy n (a whole twenty fou r
' ' ’ hou rs); s er si pe cy r aa (fou r d ays and nights) ; n a r s cy r oas
' ’ r r a (five days and nights) , etc . Note , however , po e cy o s
(three days and nights) , with the distribu tive n umeral .
' ‘ ’ ’ Th e idea at two o clock i s ex pressed by as gaa s aca ; ' ’ ’ since two o clock z cs gay x s s aco as ; since five o cl ock z cs ' ' ' ’ n s r a s aco as . o lockz o a x s ac a m , etc ; until two c g g y s o s ; fro seven o’ clock in the morning until five o’ clock in the after
' ’ ' ' ' ' n 0 0 n = cs ceMa s aco as r a o n s r a s aco as n on n r y p g o y g m.
Vocabu l ary
' asi cr aaaa performance ; show ’ r ocr a n mra hotel ’ ’ ex a d s - a g p , gen . December
n s en . n sr en . l H en a ge , g g ; g p . g d y ’ x oa r o p a ofii ce ' Jre rs e easier
' H aas pH oe exactly ' oxa H s aaaror csr they are finished ' o a a o o abou t (g en . )
' or apo er cx open s ; beg in s ' n onoaa n a half ' n onysa ns got; received ' n on on aa y g afte rn oon (adv . ) ' n opr p e r s portrait ' n ocsma er s visits ' no—r ype nx a in Tu rkish 1 06 N U M E R A L S
Vocabu lary (Cont )
' nosr a almost
' n p eg cr aag e n ie performance ' n pa d asa r es n o abou t ; approximately
’ po an o exactly '
poga Jmcs were born (pl . ) ' p 0 ga n cs was born ' cno acmm complicated
’ CH H MO K'b pictu re ; photog raph ' cr pan a na page ’ cs n r a r s count
' y s eH a x s pu pil ' ns Jrsm whole; entire
s acs hou r
' s a caa r en s n oe numeral ' s acg o number; d ate ' ' ar - a xcs ; gen . pl . e m floor; storey
' ' s maa s - 91 p , gen . Janu ary
Ex ercise 1 6
' ' ' I ? Korga Bu p og a g a cs 91 pog a n cn as r u csi sa aoceMs ' ' ' ' '
r s mecr s ecs r s aocs Mo Ms . E cg a a r o r r o co g rogy ates ,
’ ' ' '
- BaMs r en e s co oas ao ceM s Ji sr s H e r as n a . a r e p p , a JI , a ’ ' ' ' ne p s caaaca r e M H B n oma x y acr a cao as ao BaMs Jrsr s ? M as
’ ' ' ' r g s a n 0 a a s s . SI Mon o e s s a a o o co po s g rog xc Bac . I g o s m
' ' ' ' aEr ? n a r H ar o M ar m e s O s ma é s a po s a s , e ro or e ns araa Ts
' ' ' ' ' H e r s e 's cecr a aaer s H a ce s M s a r p M , a ero p m g o M ar ams .
' ' ’ ' . ' ? Cx o n s xo ar aace n as Ba me n r ocr a a ans Mos rocr a n a na
' ' ’ ' ' ' O g H a ass ca Msix s au co x a x s as ro p ogs— oaa as gaa gnar s ' ' ' ’ ' ' a r s M H co aoa n na s H 0 n a e s g a s axca . E g0 s a po o y u , o no
' ' ’ ’ ' a m r mecr aa ar on ma ers y a a epcar e r s , aor o ps H a c o g n y na
’ ' ' '
s SI H m ns n oa M H a aocs Maco r oa cr an a s . H a a x 11 . a e y p n g y I I I I I r - co r on cr pan a na apac a as m cn a Mos s Her po pa ga. H a ri m s
1 0 8 N U M E R A L S
I s e pess r p n s ac a in three hou rs
I in an hou r s e pess s acs every other hou r
' y r pO Ms in the morning ’ a o- n ony g n a in the afternoon
' ' ' nan oe a on oay g en n oe ap e Ma the whole afternoon ' n oag n a half a d ay
' ' n n n oa n a o Ji g e s (gen . y g ) midday
’ n om o s a half a night
' n o an oss midnig ht ' n egs aa week I T n s mo y eg last week , or next week that week
' ' n a a r on n egs ms this week ' ' n a n po mJI on n egs Ji s last week
' ' n a 6 y gymea n eg sirs next week
asr s rogs (gen . pl . ) year ' ’ aa r n s r a g , p , e pe ro ga two , three , fou r years
U H T B JI IST’B five years
mecr s Ji sr s six years
' aon ro g a half a year
' ' g aa gnar s og a ns rogs twenty - one years
' ' as e r 0 Ms rogy this year
' ' as n po m Ms rogy last year
' ' as 6 y gymeM rogy next year ' H a 6 y gymi n r ogs (for) next year ; al so= n ex t year
' ' r si csi s a geaar s co rs mecr
' n a g nar aro rog a of the year 1 91 6
' ' To be distinguished from n o ng en s (midday) : n o Jmoss
ee . (midnight) . S under Fraction s , next lesson N U M E R A L S 1 09
' ' n aa a gaagna r n e ro gsi ; g e . g g the twenties (historic l per
as ri r o o a na r u xs rogo od ) . U se g s only in
this sense .
’ ' on s as copoaoan x s r 0 ga x s he is in the forties
' sa gaa ro g a for the past two years ' ' ' gaa ro ga r 0 My n as a gs two years ago ' x a acgu n r0 gs every year
'
excer o g n o annually (adv . ) '
eaceMs cas n o monthly (adv . )
'
emegne an o daily (adv . )
' as s o ape Ma at that time (past)
' nopa it is time to
s s Icaas . cs r sx nop , since (conj )
'
noaa until (conj . )
r sx s s aaas . go nop , until (conj ) ' ? cs aaaa x s nops since when
D ”8. ays of the week .
' Bocx pece n s e Sunday; the only one spelt with a cap
ital resu rrection .
' ' n on egs g s n aas Mon d ay z after Sunday ; n egs i i a old word ‘ ’ m Sunday , bu t week in odern R u ssian .
' ' a T es z se n d m ar a ar o p n a s u day co , fro opo .
' ’ ' cpeg a ( cepeg a ) Wedn esday z middle day : the form cep eg a
is religious .
' I a - Th u rsd z f u r h s a s er e prs ; gen . a ay o t , from er epr si n .
' ’ ’ Fri z fifth n a n a r n ana day , from r sm; the form a n ' a r o s i s religiou s . ' = cy 6 6 0 r a Satu rday Sabbath .
‘ ’ Note that on a day is expressed by as with the accu s
' ' a n on e s g s n aas a - ative , as s g (on Mond y) , but note ao ar o p
’ ’ T a as c e n aas (on uesd y) and p gy (on Wednesday) , etc . O n
’
M . t ondays , etc is indicated by no with the d a . l . as no p , 1 1 0 N U M E R A L S
' ' c e a Ms s er ae ra Ms T p g (on Wednesdays); p (on hu rsdays) , etc . See below 1 20 .
I I 9. M onths .
N om. Gen . N om . Gen . ’ ' '
- - a n a s a i o s .na a p , p January i Ji , July ’ ' ' ( ea a as - J1 a a ar cr s — b p , February y , a Au g u st ' ' - cen r a s - a Mapr s , a M arch op , p September
' ' ' - $I A a a - an ps as , JI pril o r 6 p s , pa October ’ ’ n n n a s - a Ma , Ma M ay o op , p November ' ' ' s - a ex a s - si i xo n , n June g op , p December
' ' ' ' Th e a n aa s ( ea a Ji s cen r a o s oar a s n o words p , b p , p , op , ' s eaa o s m > 1 6 p , g p are all oxytone , while the na es of the re maining months retain the accent as it i s in the nominative
' ' ' s ea a as Ma r s as Ma s a (b pa s (in Febru ary) , bu t p ; (in March ; in M ay) .
‘ ’ Th e 1 20. answer to the question when i s expressed by
the simple accu s . , the instr . or gen . , or else by as with the
' as r es e n ie accu s . or prep . case , or by and the gen , , as as
' ' ’ a r y n os s (on thi s night); as n a r s s aco as (at five o clock); ' ' ’ ' as r si cas a geaa r co r s meCTH a Aa O M ’b rogy (in the year ' '
eMs Ms ca s m . as 6 y gym n (next onth) In indicating age , ' ' note n a g aagna TO Ms 20th year; n a a r on n eg; ’ ' a s r a n e s Ji s Ji s= thi s week (also s o g ) , bu t note the accu s . in
’ ' ' n a gpy ro e y r po (on the second morning) ; n a r pe r i n g en s ’
(on the third day) . Th e in str . i s u sed thu s : SHMO m (in ' ' Winter) ; aecn o ro (in Spring); g n eMs (by day); msTO Ms (in ' '
Summer) , bu t note as n acr oa mee as r o (this Summer); as
' ' io sa M Th e i n i n po i n Ji y y (last Winter) . gen . i s u sed in d cat ’ ' ing days of the months : n e paaro i i o Ji a (the first of July) ;
: on ti n u ou s m bu t no with the dat . pl . c ti e , as indicated above ,
' ' r a Ms m n no n a r n anaMs (on Fridays) , n o y p (in the or ings); ' ' m ‘ ’ no ns asi Ms cy r aaMs (for whole days at a ti e) . Du ring
1 1 2 N U M E R A L S
' oao n saj i s he finished ' o cen s Autumn
’ ors ér s account ; report
or s - o - g from till (g en . ) ' n apo Ms ferry
' n e e s p g before (inst . )
' n n ox o n bad
' ' anox - o - a ( s , , short form)
' n oro ga weather
' n on r o g a half a year ' ' n on ony gen n oe ap e ma afternoon
' nopa it is time
'
no cas after (gen . )
' n po ni ii si a last (time)
n on g ETs he will go
' p aoo r aro I work
' ceas s es at once
’ caae p nsm disagreeable
’ ’ co with in co M n on (w rote )
cn ar s to sleep
'
cs aaaa x s nops since , when
a cs r sx s nop s aa s since (conj . with verb)
' cu po n damp
' r es e n i e du ration
TO ecr s that is= id est
' yace already
' y s a r ei i s teacher
’ us Ji si a whole ; entire
’ s e p ess in futu re (time)
' s ar a g s have been reading
' s ar a r s to read
m o Jl a school N U M E R A L S 1 1 3
' ' ' ' ' ro ma n r aaaca r e em cen O n s 6y ger s y n acs ci y y . C y ' ' ' ' ’ s a s r a scs 6 n a s s e ess a r s s a cs , o sg . H y gy y x p n ' ' ’ ’ ' ' ' a n r a o r aro n ca s JI s a co s . H yace n o o ga p 6 y ero . H g y n e
' ' ’ ' n e Ma aMs a r n a n ace n on ony gen oe ap . H gams B o 6y gy 1 ea ' ' ' ' ’ M n JI a n e s ms n o n a a r n n e s as a H e . n o s g , o g Mory y Bac ' ' ’ ' ' n nm n n e as n s a n s aa n a ae car e r s as a r ms a n po o gs . O o o s y p o
' n s 6mm. n i e cco oms as n o mJI O M B . n s rogy . O p od p p rogy O
mx a n a 1 a n oa e r s as o g s 6 eMs 6 s . g y y gym rogy , ( y gym rog )
r or s r TH a s eaa r s c r a r n a r ar r o a a s 8 or s e s c a g o s n gna o g . C o 11 ' ’ ' ' a 1 ao en Jrsr s ? E o rcoao copos a Jrsr s . 0 r o 6 n 1 0 as copo
’ ' ' ' ' ' ' x x H s r s n an e e ca aoan s roga s . a go g Jra a r o exceg e o; ac Ms s n o; ' ’ ' ’ ' ro n a r a cn r s H a H a n a o Ms a exce g o. Hopa g a . op p . Cs s
' ' ' ' ' ' - ? aax s nops Bn n e 6 sura sgscs Cs n e paaro s a cg a a r oro Ms
' ' a B 51 c na . Cs r axs nops as s 6m s asi n ymen s a ss y n aaep car e r a
' ' ' ’ a a s a n e s ar a JI s no py cc a . Mo ys a r el r py ccaar o a sn aa
' ' ' ’ ' n aMae r ca mn o a aa s s er ae r a ms Mn e sa co g aca no p . oy g Ms
' ' ' ' , as r o o s as r ocr a n a s as r es e n i e r ex s Ms ca eas T cr s p g n p n , O e
' ' ’ ' ' ' or s n a s a o an s Jra as n e aar o an s aa M eM ap g p , a no c p p si oy g s ’ ' ' ' ’ '
a e e an s . Bs ma r s n or o o s en s I I JI X s g p p ga O EI . Korg a Bsi ' ' ' ' ' ' er e on a? o m a s er si e s oy g g H y gy g o a s p aca . BaMO a no ' ' ' ’ ’ ' ’ ' x oaO n a aecn o ro a aca a Ji s r ms sca rca ro g a g , p a, o p , a o cen s ro
’ ' ’ ’ ' cn a a caae n a Bs n n m a p p . p o y ro sa my mas s as r o p O gs . ' ' ’ ’ ' ' B r aMs o n on e s JI s n aaa C I y gy g g . HO J B 0 6 s ga 6 y gy s ar a r s
' ' ' ' ' ’
- - I ccaa . 3 a r a mn o r Msn a s no py p ro ga oe as g oc . I e p ess n a r s I I I I I I I I
s as on a 6 r s o . Bs n a r s s a as on a 6 r s aco y ge g Ma co y ge g o Ma .
, ' ' sals a aecn a Note that (Winter) , (Spring ) , ns r o (Su mmer) '
an d o cen s fem . A m , soft , ( u tu n) are u sed in the instr . to
‘ ’ m Bs ma denote ti e when . y be u sed either with the accu s .
' ‘ ’
. at m as as a r or s n s or prep to denote a ti e , ge (on this
' ' d a as a r oms r o y) , or gy (in this year) . 1 1 4 N U M E R A L S
LE SSON XVIII
NUMERALS (CONCLUDE D)
A T DlSTRl BU TlVES M LT AT VE LL V FR C IONS . . U IPLIC I S . CO E CTI E S
' ‘ ’ n n aa n a H alf , o o , is declined like a hard fem. noun ;
' r pn cs n og oaa n oa - oro) (three and a half); mecr s cs no
' ‘ ’ n a Ji oaa o (six and a half) , etc . One and a half is ex pressed ' by the separate word n og r op a declined above ; thu s : n oar o
' ' ' ' ' n r n oa r a r pa (Ii y a (a pou nd and a half) , gen . y opa di y a; ' ' ' n og r opsi caace n a (a fathom and a half) , gen . n onyr opu ca '
:rce n a , etc . I f the noun is to be in any case othe r than ’ ’ m n on r o the genitive , the for y pa is u sed for both genders
' ' c n a r n and the noun is declined in the plu ral , as s o y opa (by
' e r a Ma (with one and a half pounds) . Se above on the
' inflection of n on r opa and note the following inflection of
' ' n o Ji gen s (midday) and n o JI n os s (midnight)
SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL
Th e m m 122 , other fractions are for ed fro the ordinal s
' . : r er s e r a r s 11 as follows p , s ep (third , fou rth) , declined like 0
' ' ma s e g , bu t with oxytone accent ; gen . r per a , s er a pr a , etc .
' Th e m i a r aa re ain ng fraction s are pu re ordinals , as n (fifth) ,
' ' sacr s c cr a ce s M aa (part) being u nderstood , m a (sixth) , g
( seventh) , etc . Fraction s in general are ex pressed by u sing the ordinal as the denomin ator and the cardinal as the n u m
1 1 6 N U M E R A L S
Th e me of th e m s mm 124, following are the na s o t co on R u ssian coins and notes
' as n onr a n n a half a ru blc
ab m pyo ( . ) ru ble ' ’ n onr opa pyfiflfl a ru ble and a half , B 3 6 11 51 A E! 1 3 two ru bles ’ 3 ' HO M H H O H A 3 C 5 two and a half ru bles ’ u m 6 n e n py five ru bles ' m n n n s r s cs n on o five and a half ru bles
aon sn x a ' “ meek aon e aaa
’ ABS KO HB HKK two copecks I I n a r s E ons eas (non e ens ) five copecks I I n ar s geca r s x ons eas ' fifty CO PCCRS or na r s rpa aem ,
I I cen s geca r s E ons ex s seventy copecks or eeMs t p n aen s I I s o cen s gecs r s aons ex s I I e i ghty copecks or ao cen s r p a aen s
Th e colloquial n ames of the values are as follows
' n a r a as 5 copecks (copper) ' n a r as o xs 5 (nickel)
' r pa aen n aas 1 0 ' n ar aanr si n n sm 1 5
' gay r pa aen n ax s 20 ' n onr a n a 50 (silver)
' us uao asia one ru ble
'
r pex py6 a§ aaa 6 y Ma ataa 3 r . note
n ar apy6 ii gaaa 5 r . note
' cn n en s aaa (a little blue paper) N U M E R A L S 1 1 7
’’ '
gecar x pyfix eaaa 6 y Ma x x a 1 0 r . note
gaagnan n a r n pn Eaaa 25 r . note ' 0 cr opyGJ Eaaa Gyn a m ra 1 0 r . note '
pa gyt n aa lit . rainbow colored ' from p a gy r a (rainbow)
' ' ’ o g n ox ons es n aa n a p s a one copeck stamp
' ' 6 ‘ ( C gay xx osn e s n as 2 ' r pExx ons esn aa 3
' s er u p exx ons esn asi 4
' ' ceMa aons esn aa 7
’ ' aocs n a aons es n aa 8
' : as n a x a 125 . Distribu tives are u sed as follows g p no ’ ' ' Ogn o n x ons mrs (two one - copeck stamp s); n a r s n a pox s no ' ' ' ' a ana m es r s a x n a x o g s r ons (five 2 c . sta ps) ; ge M p o s no ce
' ' ' '
m a s es nsi x n oas . n s exs (ten 7 c . sta ps) , or ge c r cen l xons s a p
' ’
- - m h z n o s eMs a a . H ow u c , no g a py oa (at two r . each) , etc
MU LTIPLICATIVES
' P ass z on ce m 0 n n s on e) 126 . , one ti e , the word g ( being understood .
’
aa a sa z twi ce m . n n r s ass z fiv e lI p , two ti es , etc , bu t p ' a times , the old gen . pl . pass being u sed (in stead of p a so s , not u sed) .
I I I o o n m u aa ac si r n m a i i are O g a g , g g , p g , (on ce , tw ce , thr ce) I o C n obsolescent , bu t o a aagn i s u su al i n the sense some t me g , i
’ ‘ ’
m . ag o , once u pon a ti e
' Note the following idioms : n n o ro pass (many times) ; ’ ' cx o as ao pass (how many times) ; ns cxox s x o p ass (several
’ '
times); cpa sy (all at once) . H ep a ss i s practically a syn
I 0 y C I s cr o Vl Z . onym of a (often) ; , not once many ti mes 1 1 8 N U M E R A L S
' ' ' T as = as - a m s s - ac wice good as g c e , as an Jro ag a g e ' x s me r on y (this horse is twice as g ood as that one) ; cf .
' ' a r si si s s c y pass x y s me (a thou sand times better) .
' ' aon n a n n n Note the adj ectives , g o (dou ble); r po o (treble) , ' ' ' Mon o o n s r ae n o n n ar e n o n mec declined like g . Note , e p , p ,
’ ' ' ' ' r e n o a ceMe n o a aocs Me n o a eaar e n o a ecar e n o n p , p , p , g p , g p — i fou r fold , five fold , six fold , seven fold , e ght fold , nine
fold , ten fold , from the collectives .
CO LLE CTlVES
0 From 2 to 8 and 1 , there occu r collecti ve
as follows :
two together six tog ether three seven fou r eight
five ten
' '
T as . e . ao e T o e a hey inflect follows ; i , g and p like gr d e , ' and the others like s e r aepo I s e r aepo I s er a G , epsi x s I D . s er aepsi an I s er ae si x s A p s e r aepo I H s er aepu MK I P . s er aepu x s
’ These numerals are u sed wheneve r the idea two or
’ I r o e r a more of is conveyed , as p (never p ) 6m r ams :
' Th e a m eaa r e o bsence of a for g p is st range , as ' we have the multiplicative geaar ep n o n z n ine fold
1 2 0 N I J NI E I i AJ Q S
Voca bul ary (Cont )
postag e - stamp (m l
x po s , g . pl . )
swfco me at
' n y a n o necessary
' 0 g n a acgn formerly
' n oma x yacr a please
' n onoaa n a half
' n onr a n n aas hal f ru ble
’ ' n o n n os s m n og n idnight ( y osa , gen . )
' n o Mn ro I remember
I KP qéMfi how mu ch a piece
' pa gyacn n n 1 00 ruble (note) m m pass ti e (Ger . Mal . )
' p esep ay a ps tan k
I pyx a arm; han d
I (unmen s sag en ez R u ssian measu re = fathom
'
caaara say , tell (imv . )
' i a n 1 00 a cr ogo mapo si doll r (adj . )
' cr o ar s costs
n 1 00 cr opy6 3 § au ru ble (adj . )
' - a r p er s (gen . ) a third
r pex py6 n eau n 3 ru ble (adj . )
' y n r a g o away
'
s acu clock (u sed in pl . only) I s e r aepr s quarter N U M E R A L S 1 m
Ex ercise 1 8
' ’ ' ' '
s o Ma 6 n g o n a r e o . Ce Me o n r y Bac g p po g o o n e mgy r s .
' ' ' '
Zl a ar e n aMs aocs Me n Ms o Je a . M ac r o mr . , , p no g py H y p y ' ' ' ' ' HB r n cs n oaoaa n oa ( n r a a x s n JI a n r e M p by M ca . H o y n o ' ' ' ' a F x d - n a s scs s r . a fio 3 sc r opa (py n a Ma c a y g . g myoa n a n on ' ' ' ’ ' ' aa sg s Ma JI b ‘I HKa cs n r opsi came n a . H g onyr opa (by n r aMa ' ' ' ' x x s n s n amen s O MO a - n n a as a . O o n os a Ma c a py p g no y . y ' ' ' ' ' ' a r n s e r ae r a ( n r a a a as r e r a s er si Me n p p py M c a , g p , pe g e ' ’ ' ' ' — a a n . Ce s Ma a s acr s ceMa eca r a e ca r s . O n a r six s , p g g g g a
' ' ' ' ' — a si s a e car s . T n cs n og oaa n oro cs r r co r a r si c g p ( pe s ro ,
' ' ' ' ' s n r a s ar cs se r aepr ro) (by a. Bs p esep y a p M 0 ero a on ooa g a
’ ' ’ ' ’ ' n a r si x s m n 6 en sa n a H n o Ms r s TO Jl O gas ra o a . y ac a 6 0 11 s ' ' ' ' ' '
me a n r e an s a r a o Jura oas . O n a aj i a n aMs . JI no n g p g no ’ ' ' ’ ' ' n a a 0 r mecr a co a a. 6 oa a g aa go m p y Me M ero pa a n o s . ' ’ ' ' ’ n a a ag s OB H O M ’ s eJroas a n onr a n n a as n o as e Cero g g A ) y , pa
' ' ' ' a ga s may n onr opa pyog a a n a r s aon e eas Br a ' ' ' ' an a ra cr o ar s gaa cs n onr a n oro flan emy r pa ' ' nr a ? aen n axs a cx aaca eMy y . Tgs Bams nomen exs H n e
' ' ' ' ' ' ' n r ma n e n o Mn ro cao as ao n a n n t s s a ro , a a e y Me o go ge e
' ' ' '
ns as . aa s ns n r ex 6 Ji ea ro 6 M a xca as nome H g y ero p py y y y ,
' ' ' n a r a ea ro n a r a sare gaagnar a py on y . H og y sa ns cero g n a cr o ' ' ' ' a ro 6 Ma aca r a axce a cr o o Ji Ji a oa ro 6 Ma ar ' py on e y y y , a g p y y ay .
' ' ' ' ' Z a ar e MHB n oma ay acr a og n y geca r aaon s es n y ro M a pay a as r I g ' ' ' ' '
- e ons es nsix s . Z as an a r a e n r oas a s er si p x x , I Ma p no n n ; no g a
' ' ' ' '
a r a e n r oa Ha r s si a oas . ne n r a; no gec n s . p H os eMs s r o ?
m a H e r oao a r e a r aa ac M n r [Io r p n go ap . p oro g gsi ( o o pass ); n a ac n a an s ns er o as r o a n e ray x s . O g g g p ogs . S r a an a
a in Bsi as r si a s r a ag ao e e s me s sMs B a. c y p ass apaca
' ' ' '
3 r o aoa n o n cn oaa s . ase sinus on a . g p
Note th at the obj ect of a neg ative verb is alw ay s in
' ' ' c aa a r e a r r Th n . as n e at a o. e a the g e , oro , not abbrevi tion ' ‘ ’
= n o s ee m . a n p . a p eans etc 1 2 2
LE SSON XlX THE ADVERB
Th e a m m a 1 28, adverb i s u su lly for ed fro the predic te
' ' ' adj ective as x o o mi n (good) - x opon1 0 (well); rg yé o ai n (deep) , p ' myooao (deeply) Adj ectives in the soft - n i a take their ad ' ' - - a a n n i n m - a a a n e v erbs in n e or n o, as p (extre e) p (extremely)
' ' ' - a ca en n e a a a cap en n i a (sincere) p (sincerely) , bu t pa n i (early)
' ' ' - a n o s n o . Th e pa n o; n o sgn i (late) g , etc adverb i s frequently ' aosMo n o s r on n n a phrase in itself , as ac , o s n e pi ger s (it is
' ' possible that he will not come); yace n o sg n o it i s too
- a n (alre ady) late . Adj ectives in c i change thi s ending into ’ xcecaa i can for the adverb , as gpy (in a fr endly manner) ;
'
ar a Monora s ecaa (etymologic ally) . If no i s prefixed i t gives ,
‘ ’ ' H s - a the sen se in the manner of , as n o ro I o p caa (in New U Y ork f ashion) . sed with words denoting nationality , no
' ‘ ’ : - plu s the adverb in a langu age , as no an rg i n caa ( in ' ' E nglish) ; no - py ccaa (in R u ssian); no - aaao acaa (in what
Th e - l ang u age ,) etc . pre particle no i s generally u sed with
' n e the d ative to denote manner , no p xcn eMy (the same as b e
' ’ fore) ; n o aoe n n 0 My (in military style) ; no n a meMy (in ou r
own fashion) , etc .
Th e accent varies in adverbs , several of which may be
a - u a n accented in two ways as ray6 o o r. y6 o o (deeply) ; g aa eao
x o r eM n o - r eMn o gan e (far , it i s far) ; (darkly , it is dark) ; ' '
- x o o n o x on0 n o . Jr g g (coldly , it is cold)
Noun s are often u sed adverbially in the in stru mental
' ' ma r Ms a a r o Ms rou n z i r i n case , as O (at a w lk); py (a d d ect o );
' ' s a a oms T n aepx o M (on horseb ck) ; g p (for nothing) . hese ca
be best learned by practice . Sometimes adverbs appe ar in
’
the form of a preposition and su bstantive , as BMb CTb (to
' ' a r r a m m a gether) , c a (at the right o en t , propos , ju st so) ;
1 2 4 A D V E R B S
how much too at all so much
also also only
extraordin arily
' ' Note the phrases : g a a r o Ji s x o; r o a s x o a m a d ; aor s
' ' ' ‘ ' e caa on a as ao - n a s a ace, all meaning that i s all ; s c o oy g
' ' n s g o 6 pn n n a pe (if he is at all a good fellow) .
ADVE RBS OF PLACE
fian bao near
' a é nasa near by , at h and ' aae p x s u pward (direction)
' aaepx y u p (place) ; u pstairs
aesgs everywhere ' aepx o Ms on horseback '
an asy down stairs , down (place)
’ ' an asy ro pog a down town
an abs down , downstairs (direction) '
an yr pa in side , within (place) ' an y r ps inside (direction)
an s ou tside (place)
an epegs forw ard (direction) ' an epeg a ah ead (place)
aox pyrs around (pl ace)
aon s ou t (direction)
rg s where
rg s 6 14 TO i i n 6 sui o wherever it may be A D V E R B S 1 2 5
' r gs - n a6 yg s somewhere or other
' r gs - r o somewhere
' gaaeao far
’ gaJI e s e far (colloquial)
’ AO Ma at home
' goni o n home (direction)
' gopo r oro on the road sgscs here
' asan s from withou t
' a sgafla from afar
’ p I ‘ O M ' s around (direction)
' ayg a where (direction)
’ MO DC M'B by sea
' n aae p x s u p (direction)
' n asa gs back (direction)
' ' n e nyg a ag r a g o nowhere
’ n args nowhere (place)
' n aayg a nowhere (direction)
' or xy ga from where
' or cro g a from here
’ or r y ga from there
' n oacro gy everywhere
' n osa a g behind (pl . ) n on epEKs crossways (direction )
’ ’ ’ ar aMs I I YT C M ’B in this way
’ caepx s r oro above all
' caepx y above
' csa a g behind (pl . ) cn apy aca outside 1 2 6 A D V E R B S
' crog a hithe r
r aMs there
r aMs a ca Ms here and there ' r yga thither
r r y s here (coll . )
' ' ' Note 51 gaaeao n e 6 0 r a r n n s enoas as (I am far from being rich) . There are also a numbe r of su bstantives u sed in
' the instrumental which appear adverbially , as si o peMs (at ' sea); gopo roro (on the road) ; s r aMs n yr e Ms (in thi s way), etc .
’ i NDVE RBS CN THWE
Bnpy rs suddenly ' aec n o u in the sp ring - time ' ae s epO Ms in the evening ’
- ao n e p asi x s at first , fi rst of all ' ' ao as aa ass o as forever ’ an epan e first of all
' as n e pasi a pass the first time ' as n o ngen s at noon ' as n o nn os s at midnight
an peg s in fu tu re ' an po s eMs moreover ; d u r e s t e ' ape Men n o temporarily
ace: always ' acerga always ' acr apan y in old times ' as r y no py at that time (pasi ) ' asepa yesterday ' ' gaan a Ms gaan o long long ag o ' gaan o long ago
' go i i ro for a long time
emé yet
1 2 8 A D V E R B S
’ n o cms afterwards
' ' no cas sa ar p a day after to - morrow
' n or o Ms afterw ards
' n pe xcge formerly
' pa soms at once
' pa n o early
' a n s i n e p before , earlier
' pa g ao seldom
’ cer o g n a to - day ' cen s a cs at once
' cao po quickly
’ cn as a aa from the beg inning ' cn o aa again
' cpa sy all at once ' r en e p s now
' r org a then
' r o s x o- sr o j u st now
' r or s a cs immediately
' r pe r s a ro g n a day before yesterday ' yace already
' yaco long ag o
' y r pO Ms in the morning
' s a cr o often
' ’ ’ ’ n e a r az th ere m Note that o g i s no ti e , as Mn s n e aorg a
' n sn r a z form (I have no time) , while o g erly .
m m m a Fro so e of these te por l adverbs , adj ectives may
' ’ m cer n a i n n n - m e be for ed , as o g i (of to day) , fro c ro g n a ; as e
' ' ' a mn i a m ase n n smn i n p (of yesterday) , fro pa ; n (now , adj ect
' ' ' i val m n n s n e an n m n e a an ) , f ro si ; g a i (recent) , fro g o. Note ,
' ' x o a m a however , that c si , the adj . fro c o po (soon , quickly) p , m ‘ ’ ‘ ’ ean s rapid and doe s not refer to soon . Note that negative adverbs require an other negative
' ' a a r n M a with the verb , as n a o g a e s s M ca (I never eat me at) . A D V E R B S 1 2 9
' Th e combin ation ein e n e is u sed as follows : a ero eme
' him n e aa gaas (I have not seen yet) , in the same manner '
m . at n sr s m as n o c h n i c h t in Ger an Y e is u sed si ilarly ,
' cs as ax s yare n sr s sgs (they are no longer here) . Note
a x s the gen . of the pron . u sed with negative .
ADVE RBS OF MANN E R
'
aao cs perhaps (pr0 p . )
' 6 esn p ecr a n n o unceasing ly
' 6 e3 y cg o an o by all mean s
' ' as ga n n on s cay s as supposing ' asaMs n s in exchang e for
' aamo s a r ei i s n o inclu sively
'
aMs cr o instead of (g en . )
' aMs cr s together
’ an esa n n o suddenly
' ao ace n e not at all
' aoo6 me in general
’ Bp fl g s' - JI H scarcely
' ' as or n a caMo Ms g s Ji s really
' r opa sgo much more (with comp arative deg ree only)
ga yes ' gJi sr s ero wherefore
' gsn cr aa r en s n o actu ally
' sa0 g n o at one ; in accord
' eg aa - 11 a scarcely ' eg a n cr aen n o only ; solely
’ a Men o namely ' a n a s e otherwise
' acm ro s a r ea s n o exclu sively
’ a cr a n n o certainly
x axs how 1 3 0 A D V E R B S
'
- m w aaas n aé y g s so eho
' x a as - r o somehow
' aon e sn o cert ainly
' apa n n e exceedingly
' Mr n oae n n o in a moment
' Mn o raMs by mu ch
' Mo acer s ou r s perhaps
' na 0 6 0 po r s on the contrary
' n an pa cn o in v ain
n an pa Msp s for example
' n an po r a as on the contrary
' n apo s n o pu rposely
' ' n a ca MO Ms g s Ji s really
' n aca Ji y with difficu lty
' n easn as a n unexpectedly
n e naas probably
’ H CH O Mb p H O excessively
' n en peMs n n o unceasingly
' n ec0 Mn s n n o undou btedly
' n e r a x s not thu s ; w rong ly
' n eyiice Jra i s it so that
' n es a a n n o unexpectedly
n aMan o by no mean s
H BT’b no
’ o6 u x n oae n n o u su afly
' oco 6 en n o especi ally
' or n i o g s not at all
' o s en s very
' no apa n n en Msp s at least
' n o gi i a n n o actually
' n og o on o similarly
' n oao acaMs s r o supposing that
' nosr a almost
1 3 2 A D V E R B S
‘ ’ ' almost ; r aas a c a ns (this w a and th at) ; r aas ce6 s ( so- so y ,
' ' ' ‘ fair to middling) ; a a r o r o Ji s x o r aas cx asa as (I only said
' r as r sn —_ so) in j est; a o o (j u st 5 0 ) pop . yes ; r o sn o r axs
(ju st like that); on s r o sn o as n ee amo 6 Ji en s (it i s ju st as if he were in love with her); y n acs Ji o ni ag s r o s n o r aaa a
' ' ' (we have a horse j u st like that); po an o s er n pe s aca (j u st
’ fou r o clock) .
Frequently particles are inserted which have in them
m . Th selves no special eaning e chief of these i s r o, u sed
m m m s after adverbs of place , ti e and anner , It so etimes h a
' ' ‘ ’ the force I wonder : thu s rgs r o on s n ax o g ar ca (I wonder
’ ' where he i s) ; aorg a r o on s 6 y ger s y n acs (I wonder when = u s t . he will be with a ou r hou se) On the other hand , r o m m sometimes has the force of a ere e phatic enclitic , as ro
' ' a s - r o a n r oao ro as aop r e p ( to speaking , I do not speak) .
' a — Sometimes it has lso the force of su rprise , as r en e p s r o
’ a sn a ro (now I know) ; r aas - r o (it i s
' O m e c s ther particles of a si ilar character are g aar ,
' ' ' ' ' I ' a ms n cn oca ns ar o e caar s a r o c MoJ s , 6 , as ero p , g , aasa as
(I asked h im who it really was who had said this) ; ar o Mon s
' ' i s n as 6 a ms r n r aMs (who , I wonder , there) ; a a o assi aa er ca
(I wonder how that is called) , etc .
CO MPARlSO N OF ADVE RBS
Th e comparison of adverbs is precisely identical
’ aecen with that of the predicate adj ective , as o (j oyfully) ,
' ' ' ns csx m aeceg s e (more j oyfully) , aece e a s ( ost j oyfully); Ji y s me
' ' ' 6 o Jrse m n s (better) ; x y ace (worse) . Note that ( ore) , and Me e
m m n . (less) , are exclu sively adverbial for s u sed only in co pariso ' They are themselves comparatives respectively of Mn o ro (mu ch) ' ' ma sa 6 o Ji se ma o ain m and Mari o (little) . Thu s , one y y p ( ore
' ' broad broader) bu t it i s necessary to say 6 o Ji s me 0 Mo as , , g A D V E R B S 1 3 3
' ' Me n s me Ji oma e n z less (of) hou ses ; g (of) horses , but
' ' ' s Me n se an co xaa Ji o mag (a less tall horse) . Note the phrases
' ' ' ' 6 0 Jrse aJi a Me nse (more or less) ; n a 6 0 11 se n a Me n se (neither
' Th e m n aa o more nor less) . su perlative for s 6 11se (the most) ;
' ’ ’ Me n se MC H BC a n aa (the least); cero (anything rather than) ,
m a should also be observed . Co par tives preceded by no are
' ' - as m - n a e u sually adverbial , as no i e (a little higher); no xr (lower);
' ’ - n 0 - 6 11 a ace no ga n s me (fu rther); (nearer) , etc .
In the following vocabulary , the adj ectives only are given
from which the adverbs in the exercise are formed .
Vocabu lary
' ap a 6 cai a Arabic
' 6 a 6 ynma grandmother
6 ams indeed
' 6 JI a xce nearer
' 6 11 a sxi n near
' aaep x y above ; u pstairs
' aepx o Ms on horseback
aecEJmn j oyou s
aor s a ace that i s all ' asi nre hig her
' r ny6 o aia deep
' r oaopa aa they spoke
' r oaop a as he spoke
' r oao a r e a ( i p spe k you mv . ) ' r po MKi n loud
g al l ema far ; distant
' g e caar s really
’ AOMO H homeward (directive)
' r s a gpy s (pl . g py s ) friend
' gp y xcecai n friendly
' gy Mai o I thin k ’ 1 3 4 A D V E R B S
Voca bulary (Cont )
' gs n aer s he does
' a g a or ’ H C H H m n e ear est (soft adj . ) aaas how ? ' non e sn o certainly
' aerna h ave lain down
n a to (with accu s . )
' n aas p n oe really
' n aae p x s u pstairs (directive)
' n aaepx y upstairs (place where)
' n asn aa er ca it i s called
I n na n s - o - a a ca , , written ' n aps s ie dialect ; adverb
' ' n a caMo Ms g s Ji s really
' n a sx in low
n sr s no
' s - H i o I o pacai a New Y ork (adj .)
' o6 x o g ar ca has relations with
' oco 6 en n n a especial
' or ay g a from whence
' or cxo g a from here
' n or oa0 pa r s speak with
' n o on a g g r e approach (imv . )
' n omaaa er e you feel
n oer s sings
' n on a r e i g go ( mv . )
' no - aaao acaa in what tongue
' no sr a almost
' n omaa she went
' n a a r e p g come you (imv . )
n pai n eg s he came
n smx o Ms on foot
| 36 A D V E R B S
' ' ' ' ' ' ' e cn a a r o r as n e i n si an r s . n s r o n s x o a , Bsi g omc ero gs O
' ' ' ' m n n n a a aaa s r o n a 0 Mo na s ro or a. Kax s si n om p e s g , y g B
' ' ' ’ ? ' - m n er e Tans ce6 s n e cna mKO Ms x opo o . O n s a ca MO M b
' ' ' ’ ' gs Ji s 0 s e n s cep s esen s Bsi r oaop a r e no - py ccaa x y iae ssMs
' ' ' ' m r n r a l i s n o r o Mir a MO M a s n oe o o o. H a e s B 6 pa s . O a s g p
' ' ' ' ' ' s Ji n a en s eJi o cer o n a r o a s a ns ssM g s y xs o s ae c g , p g o ece e s
' ' ' ' ' ' ' as e m Ji o ma s asi i n e MO ea n 0 11 s me 11 0 pa . Ba a g . y ero 6
' ' ' ' ’ ' ’ m Kr o e caar s r o caasa n s ? Br o n M r a . a age s s s y ero o n , g ,
' ' ' ' a n n a r M a n a c asa s M s M0 gpy s ap o acx i . H o g a r e n oan me;
' ' ' ' ' n me O a n 1 os n o a xcc n o a n s . I I o a r e o J a aée x ; g g g 6 . H \ y no
' ' ' ' ? r a n r s a e s n - s n n o op cs Ba M c p és o. Kas s 6 am a r o assiaa er c I I I * r n a s 3 o asa a er c yp o aoMs .
LE SSON XX
T RB T N S S AN D M HE VE , E E ORPHOLOG Y
RE GU LAR vaaa
Th e R 1 32 , study of the u ssian verb should be divided 1 m into two quite distinct sections ; viz . ( ) that of the for s , Th and (2) that of the aspects . e present lesson deals only
with the f o r m s of the Infinitive , Preterite and Present of
the regular verb .
T . a here are three classes of R u ssian verbs , i . e , regul r ,
T . e . variant and irregular . here are really only two tenses , i ,
a present and a preterite , by mean s of which the sense of
' = - as m Note the u se of no a little , in no i e (a little higher); ' ' no - n a ace (a little lower) ; no - g a n s me (a little farther) ; no
'
6 11 a ace (a little nearer) .
' m Note the in str . y po KO Ms which is a su pple ent to
' '
n a a r n = i . the Verb , sn a e c y p o a0 Ms t is called for a lesson T H E V E R B 1 3 7
T the futu re and plupe rfect may also be expressed . here
a . are , however , two conj u g tion s
FIRST CONJUGATION
Th e first conj ugation consists of verbs , (a) with
m - a - a - s con sonantal ste s plu s a connecting vowel , , ; (b)
m . . with pu re consonantal ste s , i e , withou t connecting vowel ; m m and (c) with pu re vowel ste s , viz . , verb ste s ending in
m - r s a vowel . To these basic ele ents are added to form
- J1 s m the infinitive , to for the preterite , and the following tense endings
SING ULAR PLURAL
- - 1 p . 1 0 (y) eMs
- s - 2p . en1 er e
- - r - 3 p . er s 1 o s yr s )
To illu strate , we have the following characteristic instances
C ONN E CTI N G
E I N F E I G RE T . E I G ST M . ND N P ND N VOWE L I a to read
H to me asu re (u sed only in composition with preformative p art ' i ele , as p asMsp si r s me asu re out)
to redden , blu sh blow
heat (v a) I t
- - 1 n 3 . Th e p . sing . y a d p pl . y r s appear afterroots
a a - 10 - 1 or m ending in a sibil n t which c nnot take , s , as es e
z r my m eae my r s ( ro s ) .
= t r n si i Th e abbreviation v a. a t v e (active) verb ; v n intransitive (neu ter) verb . 1 3 8 T H E V E R B
Th e e as 1 33 . student n e d have no concern to the correct h connecting vowel of t i s conj u g ation , as thi s i s always given
- in verb lists and dictionaries . In fact , it may be regarded as being p ractically an essential p art of the stem . To form the present ten se of the above p aradigm - verbs the above
m su lfix ed indicated endings are si ply , as follows
SiN C U LAR
I I I I I I - - - Ms - a - x n - - - - 1 p . s ar a 1 0 p 1 o pac s to gy to rps 1 0 I I I I I I r - a - en1 s - Ms - si - en1 s K acn - s - en1 s - e s - n1 s 2p . s a p p gy n1 r ps e I I I I I I s ar - - er s - Ms - n - er s a acn - s - ers - er s r s - er '1 3 p . a p p gy p
PLURAL
I I I I I I a - - em - Ms — a - Ms a acn - s - eMs - e r s - eMs 1 p . s r a s p e p gy Ms p I I I I I I - r - — er - Ms - a - r K acn - s er e - r r s - er e 2 p . s a a e p e e p gy e e p I I I I I I 3 r - a - r s - Ms - a - ror s a acn - s - ror - s - 1or s p . s a ro p p s gy rors rp
As m to the proper accent of all for s except the 1 p .
a sing . , this is always best indic ted in R u ssian verbs by the accent of t h e s e c o n d p e r s o n s i n g u l a r . Th e i n i fin it v e and the first person singular are not always , bu t m a y b e accented quite diff erently to the rest of the
a inflection , bu t the third person sing ul r and the first , second an d third person s plu ral follow the accent of t h e s e c o n d
p e r s o n s i n g u l a r . If , however , the accen t of the first
m a person i s n o t on the ter in tion , then the other forms follow the tone of the first person sing .
It mu st be noted that the p reterite in - as does n o t
s 51 inflect for person , bu t only for g ender and n u mber , a ,
' Ta ou s s ar a Ji s a , (I , thou , he re d , or have [has] read) , bu t m if the first person speaking i s fe inine , or the second and m third personal su bj ects are fe inine , the preterite becomes
' n m s a s nr a a, and , if a neuter su bj ect is present , the for
' ' ’ ' ‘ r a i i o ar a I BTa Jl O an u . h as appears , as g ry (the child [neu t ]
”0 T H E V E R B
(a) disappears when the person al ending s are
r person al ending s of Conj . II a e as follows :
10 (y
- BT'L
They are applied directly to the pu re con son antal verb m ste , as :
I I I I aens r s command g epxca r s hold r oao p ar s sp eak nsn a r s v alu e ' ' ' ' aeJuo g epacy r oaopro nsn io
' ' ' ' aena w s ge pacams r oaopa ms ns n a ms
' ' ' ' aena r s ge pacar s roaopa r s ns n ar s
' ' ' ' aeJm Ms ge pxcaMs r oaop a Ms ns n aMs
’ ' ' ' aeJi a r e g e pacar e roaopa r e ns n ar e ' ' ' ' aena r s g e pacar s roaopa r s ns n a r s ' ( z g e pxc- a r s )
' E special attention mu st be p aid to the g rou ps I X 1 42 m an d X, , which g ive all nor s of this second con j u g ation .
Th e m a 1 35 . student u st observe c refully the following
- table of changes , to which the root consonant , a s i t a p p e a r s
i n t h e i n f i n i t i v e , is su bj ect when the inflection of the present tense is applied :
’ ’ ' — l ‘ T b O H BJK 6 n s ems r xc ODH S a D Y p i a sprinkle (Conj . I)
' ’ ’ — rJi o a r s I ‘JI O JR rao mems n aw n ibble n g xc g y g , (Co j . I) ’ ' ' — xc c n r s c m c ams ou g y g y y y g judge (C j . I l )
“ - Th . a e 1 p . sing . y , as in Conj I , appe rs after roots
- 10 z ending in a sibilant which cannot take , as M ary ( i o)
' from Mcr a r s (take vengean ce) . T H E V E R B 1 4 1
I — 3 7K 1351 3 3 . Tb
I BOBB T b
I I — I ‘ K I M E RE . T b KJI H I C I II b
C— II I - c11 ar s - l II JI € I] I b
I r eca T b
C T— [II MCTHTb
T— II I aaeaer a T b
I X— [II n axa Tb
In Conj . II the consonantal change appears only in m the 1 p . , but re ains throughou t in Conj . I .
a After labi ls , there i s an insertion of 11 in the first
a m conj ug tion which re ain s through all the persons , as r pe
' ' ' r s r enmo r e n neni s na , p , p (see Grou p II of the following
list) , bu t in the second conj ugation , this inserted 11 appears
in the first person singular only , and then disappears in the
' ' r s 1 remaining person s , as 11 1 0 6 a , 1 10 6 an1 s .
Th e student should u se the following list of grou ps with its alphabetical list for reference in his futu re reading .
Th e 1 36 , student will take note that the infinitive
m a is not the nor of the conj ug tion , as in other lan guages ,
i nfin a on u i . e . , one cannot tell by the . lone to which i c j g ation a verb belongs , bu t only by the second person sing I ular . Note also that the second conj ugation (Grou p X and
- a X) h as always the distinctive ending r s in the 3 p . plu ral .
Th e first step in studying the R u ssian verbs is to r e c o g n i z e t h e f o r m which one sees or hears . 1 42 T H E V E R B
Vocabu lary a an d (= but and)
' ' '
- 6 si srar s 6 si sac n s n a x oro . p ; p y , ei sprinkle (lit u pon) ' aa xcnsi n important
' a a r s a s s - en1 s s ; o My , take
' ae s eps evening
' ae s epoms in the evening
' ' ' an sr s aa sx aa ms g ; y , g a see ' an ama n ie attention I I I aosa r s ; aoncy ao sain s c onvey (in vehicle)
I I CO T“ BHQ HHB U OK H TH O natu rally (lit . entirely p reh en si v ely )
' as r eps wind
' ’ ' a s : aa sa r s ; aaary , a acem bind knit ' rase r a newspaper ' rase r s aas newsboy
' r 11 aro 11 s verb
' ' ' r s - - roaopa ; 1o , a n1 s speak
' ' ' a r s e ac e xcai n s hold ; keep gepxc , g p y , g p I I I I i n fin . - - ” mu st (followed by ) mx en s n a n o . H bl go ; , , pl ' r s - ai o - en1 s t gy Ma ; , a hin k ' AYTb ? Ay emb blow ' r - - ms ; m gs n a s ; aro, ae do ake f gsno thing ; af air
’ SaKO H B' law
' - la no saao n y according to w ' BCMJI H land ; earth
' ' s n s sn ar ; sn a ro , s a em know
' asas cr i e news
' ’ r s - - a ms ; a asys a ; a io , e study le rn
' H MH n ame: noun
' ' H MH CYIH CCTBH TCJI B H O C substantive
' aa acgs m each ; every
T H E V E R B
Voca u l r b a y ( Cont. )
' cno xcn n n complic ated
’ ' ’ can mar s n1 C H HI H HI b ; c11 si y , JI hear
' cpa sy all at once ' cr ar s a article
' cr si gn si a shamefu l ' ' ' n s - - y s a r ; a ro, a ems find ou t
' (bo pMa form ' x os v y I wish (irreg . b. ) ' ' ' s nr s - - s a r ; a 1o , a em read ' ’ s yao x s (pl . s ynx a ) stocking
' sas eMn nsi s p copy (of book , pape r , etc . )
Ex ercise 1 8
' ' ' ' ' ' ar a an a r r cr r s i o H s a ro c oro y , a Bu s a a er e ero a .
' ' ' ' ' ' Kr o s ar a 11 s r axs n o sgn o as Ba men ao Mn ar s as epa ae
' ' ' ' ' s e Ms ? H n ro n a aa m ce r aor a pO n e s a , o gsg s Ba y c py , g
' ' ' ' ' ' ' on a 6 11 an a r r Mo xcer s 6 s r s on a 6 n1 1 a r aMs . pa a y co e oga , i ' ' I ' '
s a maa n ox acn s Ji a aor a Bsi en caasa a oos a r n s . li y p , g o
' ’ ' ' ' Cero n a as r e s er s ca Ji s n o n o n e r ax ca Ji s n o naxs g , p gy , s
' ' ' I ? 11 s as e a I r o s as aa x s n a as gy p . y Bac py y Me py ' ' ' ' ' ' I x a s 51 an I r er ? n x s 6 0 11 n1 a a ra . o gs 11 a s me n ma n a e n m
' ’ ' xce an cs r oao a r s n n Hr o si n a aa rs syn . B p o eMs a n e . B
' ’ ' ' ' ’ ? Maer e o6 s a TO M s H n as n e Mai o s r o n e gy ero gy , Moe
' ' ' ' ’ ' s r a r e an aMa n i — E n s r n SI g 11 0 . O 6 pa e u 6 p xce e a MC H . Korga
' ' ' ' ’
51 sn n a r a as ca r n . a d aa g s , o s a oe o g py r a n a aar 0 M0 6 11s
' ' ' ' ' — a m a r r n a r 3 r n e ano n . O n e e my s g py s g py a. o no s y
' ' ' ' ’
‘ - I r s Ji aer s M a a ? n s a m r - n KaKO M 'B o g yxc s O n e s n a 0 11s . I Ia
' ' ' ' ' ' ns? H a n o 11 s x or o oe n n n a g ema M M r y n o no , p p g no oe y o n ,
' ' ' ' ' n m r en e p s pan agaea r s g py r o My n any . Kr o apas a r s n a
' ’ ' ' ’ n ? as a r r as rs ax - 0 s s y ans Kp s e n . I l ec Mn s n n o, ecr aa xcn u as
' ’ ’ ' ' ' a n a B H H - i x i r o n sas cr o O H . Ho Mo ei i cc e rna nu n e i n o o gy y , py I I I I r x r n n xs M c n ecr an r e s n a . (D Msi m a a s pyg si , a a en a y i g si o p T H E V E R B 1 4 5
' ' ' ' r n as n e r as cno xcnsi naxs ( o Msi am n s c mecr aa r eg s o o a , b p e y
' ' ' ' ' s a eMs c ai si ssi xs n e c11 s n six s . 0 r o r aas . Mn a sy py c n ;
' ' ' ' ' ' mK M u c a r O M s r o c gyer s asy s a r s cna O s M o ro p sy , n o y py
' ' ’ ' ' ' c ai a (bo pMsi a caoaa o s en s pasna s n si or s n a max s an rni a ’ ' ' ' ’ ' a n r a s en s caax s a e cn a caa m oms u o o ys r s cpa sy , r o o
' ' ' ' ? s Mn ar - om x aas a r py g n o san o Mn ar . H o e aa Bsi r ax s x op o
' ' ' ' '
a n a o s en s 6 0 r 51 n a Ma r s . Kr o Ban s 11 11 s Il , y Me ra a noc a ' ' ' ' ' ? n e a r y r ase r y Mo or e ns , on s s a cr o n ocsura r s H ams r a
' ' ' ' ' ' ' a r se r n a an a r a . Caaxca r e eMy n oaca x y c a n ocaa r s moe u y
' ' ' ' ' ' ' a s a n e a r a r gpy ry ns c on o n o po s a o rase si . O n s o s en s x o ' ’ ' s r s s er s n posar a r s r y cr a ro .
I o ‘ ’ In the u se of the verbs n oc1 1 a r s mean i ng send as a I 1 m r s . . n ocs a m i perfected action , e once or twice , and ean ng
‘ ‘ ’ sen din z sen d be g as a regul ar thing , w e have an anticipation XXIV of Lesson on the Aspects .
Th e first and second person s of the tense of each verb
are an g iven in this d the subsequent vocabularies .
LE SSON XXl
THE lMPE RATlV E D L E , G RUNDS AN PARTI CIP ES
Th e m m 3 . 2 . 1 7 , i perative has two for s ; viz p sing .
'
- - - 2 . . T . a s and p plu ral hese end (sing ) in , , a ; (pl . ) '
- - - ar e s r e a r e . As in , , the 2 p . pl . of the present tense ,
l m - the indication of the plu ra i perative 2 p . is also r e .
To a 1 im - indic te the p . pl . v . , r e i s often suffi xed to the
'
1 . . sa r a eMr e p pl present , as (let u s read) etc . ,
Th e m - a - n r e for s , are u sed after vowels i . e. after , ,
“ - m verb ste s plu s the connecting vowel , or pu re vowel stems I I I - - as sa r a r s i mv . s ar n r e r s i m v n r (read) , a ; gy (blow) , . gy e .
See a below on the p rticiples for pu re vowel stems . 1 4 6 T H E V E R B
- After verb stems endin g in o n e consonant , when the accent f of the 1 p . sing . present i s n o t on the suf ix , we find imper ' ’ m - s - r e aa sr s aa ac ative for s in , , as g (see) , y (I see) , with
’ ' - m im a s - the accen t on the verb ste , and v . a g r e; pa n ar s
' ' ' n i o imv n s - r e a ar s (wound) , pa (I wound) , and . pa ; s p ( be
' ’ im s - lieve) , as pro (I believe) , v . as p r e, etc . Finally in thi s
' ' - a - r e m su fii x connection , the for , with accent on the a , i s ed
m m n to consonantal ste s which end in one or ore consona ts , bu t only when the 1 p . sing . pres . has the accent on the
' ' a s ending , as y pa r (smoke) , x ypro (I smoke) , imv . ay ' ' ' - r Mn r s m m n Mn m p a e, but , n o a (re e ber) , o ro (I re ember) an d ' ' ' i n n - e n o ar s n 0 o 11 ac mv . o M a r ; pog nxc (prolong) ; p g y (I prolong) ,
' im n - r e T and v . pogo Jmca . here are a few ex ceptions to th is m ff i rule , but , as most of the a ect variant verbs and rregulars ,
’ they will be con sidered in the su bsequent lessons .
When the presen t tense , as in the paradigms indicated in Grou p II i s su bject to the consonantal ch anges
im . m shown in the previou s lesson , the v for follows the same
consonantal change as the 1 p . sing of . the presen t tense , as
' ' ' aa a r s aa xc imv aa -r e Ba - s (bind) , y (I bind) , . 1x a , n o t sis r e;
' ' ' ' r eca r s r m imv r m - s (hew) , e y (I hew) , . e a r e; naca r (write) ,
' ' i ma - r n amy (I write) , mv . na e. etc .
G E R U N D S
T I 3S. here are two gerunds , present and past , ex
’ - pressing the so called carrying clau se , which are without Th inflection of any kind . e present gerund is u sually made
- by omitting the ending of the 3 p . pl . i or s (or after ce rtain
m - - a r - soft sibilan t ste s y rs ) and s , and su bstitu ting a ; thu s
' ' ’ n a si s s n a ror s (they know) , ger . s (knowing); roaop r s (they
' ' ' r oa a cr oa r s n speak) , op speaking); (they stand) , ger . cro
m - n s (standing) , etc . Note that in co pounds with s ar , as
43 T H E v a n a
'
. . tc . r ao m i n a r s r s pres act p ym ; p y (they tear) , from p aa ,
' ' '
te. a i n r oa a r s a m o m r ao . p p y ; p (they spe k) , fro o p a r s , ptc
' ‘ r oa a a h o i T e . . t . p m , etc . pres act p c of 6 n r s (6 ygy r s they ' ’ ‘ ’ ‘ ’ 6 in m . will be ) is y gym and generally eans next , fu tu re
Th e past active participle is formed from the preterite
by omitting the - 11 s and su bstitu ting for it the soft ad
ecti v al - am a - amaa - ar j ending i , , nee , which like the present ,
' ’ arti ci le x o o mi a r ao a as p p ,fis declined like p ; thu s , o p (he spoke) , ' ' ' mi a 11 tc r oao a a s 11 a s g aami n . past p . p ; g (he was doing), gs
- 11 Th e vowel connecting the pret . s to the stem is always
' ' Ji mma m n aens s t . aeas a i retained , as (he co nded) , past p e ; ' n am a 6n11 s (he was) , past ptc. 6 i , etc .
h e m 1 T present passive participle i s for ed from the p .
- pl . present by su bstituting for the final Ms the ending ' '
- - - M a s ar eMs c . sar a Msi n , a , Moe , as a (we read) , pass . pt e
' ' an ( m r eca r s r m n s M i so ething which i s being read) ; (hew) , e e ' ' C II I M H 11 (we hew) , pte. T C H (being hewn); 10 6 a Ms (we love) ,
' ' '
a roa a Ms r ao a Msm . . ptc. 11 10 6 a Msi ; op (we speak) , p tc. o p etc
Th e past passive participle is formed from the infinitive
: of the verb in two ways first , by su bstituting for
- a - as the r s of the infinitive the dj ectival endings ,
- - = r di ate m - n n si n - n n aa - n n oe n a, n o p e c for , and , , for
m an n the lon or attributive for , d secondly , by su bstitu ti g g ,
- - - - r r a r o for r s of the infinitive , the endings s , , for the
m - r si n - r as - r oe short , or predicate for ; and , i , for the long , or attribu tive , form . Th e long forms of these participles are declined exactly like the hard adj ectives .
r m E xamples of the first method , which i s by fa the ore
' '
s ar a r s fc . s a r a s common one , are as follows : (read) , p n
' ' ’ s n — n n i i n r en a r s s ar a n n si n ; s n ar (know) , sn a s s a n ; p (peel) ,
- - ma i n fin . ar s r penan s r pen an n u n etc . Verbs with the in ke
’ - n - n n n O HB H H T b a o6 aa n €n s thi s ptc. in e s , c si , as O ( ccu se) , T H E V E R B 1 4 9
' - a n n sa r s a s n n n T o6 an g nu ; y (te ch) . pt c . y e si . hese are fairly
- a s representative instances of the verbs in r , with and with
ou t the accent on the ending . On the other h and , verbs which do not accentu ate the in fin . ending u se the form in
' ’ '
- - — n s n n a n en n n n . en s , en n s m, as pa ar (wound) , ptc. pa e s p
in fin - ar s ff In the case of verbs with . in , which su er a
a - m 1 chan ge in the last conson nt of their verb ste s in the p .
tc . m sing . , the past passive p is for ed in accordance with
' ' r r s n Ji s that conson antal change , as sann a a (pay) , sa a y (I
' ' '
- san a s en s . s n no s en san 11 s n n si n will pay) , pte. a (pr a s ) a e (pr .
sang o s en n n n o6 ar a r s o a tc . ) ; p (tu rn) , 6 p my (I tu rn) , p o6
n — a n a ar a r s n cs pame s o6 p me nsi ; noc (visit) , o my (I visit) ,
e — n a — pte. n ocsm n s n ocsmen si . E ven when an 11 infix occu rs in
the 1 p . sing . , this 11 i s reprodu ced in the past pass . ptc. ,
' — 11 r s 1 1 0 6 11 10 t . 11 10 1 e n 11 1 1 as 10 6 a (love) , (I love) , p c 6 1 s 10 6 en
' ' s a n mo c a — a n sra ; xyn a r (buy) , y (I buy) , pt . y n aeH s y n aen n na .
E xamples of the second method of forming thi s part
' — i ci le a r s a tc . Msir s Mn r si a 6 ar s p are su ch verbs as M i (w sh) , p ; ’ ’ HT ’ — H H r sr s r s — r s n s (beat) , O b O TH ; p (heat) , p r s p r si ; asr (sing ) ,
' — m m n sr s as r si n . These for s u st be largely determined by
m - practice . They are ostly pu re vowel stems , and not stems
with a connecting vowel .
Voca bu lary
’ 6 esn pecr a n n n n incessant
' ' 6 ar ao Ms n a6 a r s m chock full ; packed
'
6 11 a socr s (f. ) neighborhood
' no 6 11 a socr a in the neig hborhood = nearby I 6 s g n ocr s (f) poverty
a11 ro6 11 en n si n as (aoro ) in love with
a11 10 6 11 en s — a1no 6 11 en a (short form) I I I o a aos r s a a s a x s c a : c o y , c o ams j ump u p T H E V E R B
Voca bu lar y (Cont ) I I I asi msir s - IO - 1 s ; MO , Moen wash I I I an eg ar s an u no an m1 1 ms ; n , e send out I I I an s a cr ar s an s am an s a cr a ms ; y , clean , polish
' r pa sn si a di rty ' o o r g p a road , way ' sa 11 a (also sans masc .) hall
' s r n a r en s n si n fi ea a a pyg dif cult , unpl s nt
' sgopo as e (neu t . ) health ' eaceg n e an o daily (adv . )
' apa nca theft
' ' ' a a r s a io a ams y p ; yp , y p smoke
' ' ' e ms nema r s ; Ji excy , Ji xca lie down
' 11 10 6 a Mna favorite
' Ms cr o place
' n e aorga there is no time ' n ecmor p a n a (sr o) in spite of
' ' n pa aar csi (KoMy ) it pleases (reflexive)
' ' ' o6 aa n a r s - aa n i o - a ms ; , accu se ' ’ ' n aca r s am n a mems ; n y , write
' ' ' n Ji a aar s n1 1 a s n aa s ems ; y , weep ' n a ar s - ro - an1 s o s p ; p , believe
' n ox oxce n ie position
' n ocr e as (f) bed
' n pa aga tru th
' n pecr ynne n ie c rime ' ' ' n o omica r s - a 1o - cai s p g ; , a prolong I I I n pox 0 g a r s ; - x o gams pass by ' o r ar s - ai o - ms p a6 ; , ae work
' pas6 o n n aas robber
' p asroao ps conversation
' ' n l — a ca o rs ; p . boot I I I caa sa r s ; caaxcy can stems tie u p
1 5 2 T H E V E R B
L E S S O N XXll VARIANT vaaas
Th e variant verbs in the following paradigm list may be briefly indicated as follows
s In the First Conj ugation , Grou p I , the verbs Mar ,
' ' ' r Mo ems nsr s r n o ms ar s 6 s Mo o , (wash); , no o , E (sing) ; 6 , i o ,
' 6 s ms r n ar s r n iro r n iems e (beat) ; , , (rot , putrefy) .
n : aaa r s ro ms i - 1 r s Grou p II the verbs g , ga gae (g ve); c1 a , 0 . m 10 - 1n11 ms - cr 11 ar s r 1 0 e ms 11 , e (send); , c e 11 , cr 11 e (spread) ; co I I I r s c - a - ems sga , o s acgy , co sa acg (erect , construct) .
I I I III : a 1 1 0 r s a ms Grou p the verbs 0 , s ome x 0 e (spli t); I I I I I I s m 11 ms i n s 1 s MO J1 O r , Me o Me e (gr nd); ox o r , 1 1 01 1 0 no 11 em
(weed) .
' ' - a r s s Grou p IV : the verbs in e a , as aoeaa r , aoro ro, ao
' ' ' ' m a r s enc e ms ro e s (fight); meme a , M y ro, M acy e (measu re , su rvey
' ' - a r s a r a r a land) and the verbs in o a , as co s o a s , co s r yi o , co
' ms as r y e (advise) .
' s a a ms s Grou p V : the verbs saar , so y , so é (call); 6 par ,
' 6 e 5ms epy , 6 p (take) .
All the verbs in Grou p VI and VII .
l VIII - a r s - n A l the verbs in Grou p which end in y ; y ,
' - i s - - n ne n ; n y , § ms .
It will be observed th at all the verbs and grou ps indicated above belong to the Fi rst Conj ugation bec au se th ei r pre sent
------10 ms M r e i o . inflection i s in , y ) , e , er s , e s , e , rs , yr s )
e a r s a sr s ar s n s Not th t Ma , , 6 and r ar belong in Grou p I ,
This section mu st be carefully compared wi th section s 1 42 , 1 43 . T H E V E R B 1 5 3
' Th ana r b cnar s becau se they end in vowel stems . e verbs g , ,
~ Tb II cn ar s , C 0 3 A2 belong to Grou p , becau se they are con
- Th e sonantal stem verbs with a variant present inflection . characteristic of Grou p III is the o- ending in the infin itive and
' ' - - b - nar b prete ri te . Grou p IV verbs all end in eBar , o , but not in
- s I . ma r m ean , m eat , which verbs belong to Group (pres a o ,
- - nBaro) . Grou p V verbs are all contracted con sonantal stems with some helping vowel inse rts in the present tense , as
' ' B 135111 5 aTa 6 e €mb 3 8 am) , so y , 3 0 (call); 6 p , epy , 6 p (take) , a peculiarity which also appears in a few verbs of Grou p II ,
' ' '
- - r 1 > cr e n mb - ar b 3 n ac as cu a , er eni o , e (spread); 3 ;i ,
: ori i germ (constru ct) . Grou p VI shows verbs whose g n al
m- m s final ste consonant disappears in the infinitive , as ,
'
L m . I IJI HBT . an n n m s emb for ; pres n y , (see paradig s) Grou p VII shows verbs with elided stem consonants as in Grou p
VI i fin VIII , plu s a variant n . in 4 11 . Grou p , the last division
- - B Tb n m enu ) of the First Conj ugation , shows verbs in y , y , ; '
- ml ) Hy , 4 1 3 , all with highly specialized perfective meanings XXIII (see Lesson on the Aspects) .
Th e I 4 ] . variant verbs of the Second Conjugation are
- 10 y ms - ' - those with present in ( ) , u , 4 1 m , E M B, m e, a n .
These verbs are only slightly variant— much less so than the variants of Conj . I . Note chiefly in Grou p I X the i n fin iti v es
' ' ' ' ' - an cr osr Tb cr oro cr on mb a e nca r b e m in as , , (st nd) ; n p , A p y , ' ' ' ' e xcn mb nu m r' b n p (hold , keep); c a , em my , cm mn mb (he ar) ;
w r n M B and a , q , q (g allop , leap) . Group X shows no variants at all .
Th e m m for s of the i peratives , p articiples an d g erunds f are su ficiently indicated in the following paradigms . 1 5 4
H z. G R O U P
FIRST CO N
GROUP 1.
lN FlN l’ l' lVE
- emb
PRETE RITE l . PAST GERUND 11.
“ 8 111 3
Th e fig u res marked with an asteri sk are commented
1 5 6
l l . CON
lN Fl VE PRE SE NT
aB Tb an . n a , n
CJI aTb m ' cr nar b c r en xo ' - co- snar b co- 3 n m i y
PRETERITE l . PAST GERUND ll . PAST
*1 1 op * 1 2 T pen 1 3 rnon * 1 4 manta * 1 5 mer * 1 6 Kn eBeT $ 1 7 Ba 3 * 1 8 T ec $ 1 9 6 pu 3 r - - - $ ' am, am, anmn 20 m n x * 2 1 max *22 c; $ 23 gas 24 ca
2 5 cr n - an m - aam
26 3 A
o - rm Th e old second gerund q m , y u sed chiefly now in the 1 5 7 SONANTAL STE MS PRE SE NT PARTICIPLE GERUND PASSIVE
' o p emm ' Tpe n JI eMH n ' rno ncemn n ' ma xcnemu n ' n e qemn n
’ m ene meu n n ' Ba memu n ' Te memm ' Gpu smemu n ' m u s e n n a ' n a memmn
' cs emn n ' gaBa eMu n naemu n
mn emu n ' cr e u em m ' 3 n xcnemn n
PAST PARTICIPLE PASSIVE ' o p am. ' T pe n am . ' rno nam,
- a 3 mm me TH BaTI :
' Bx su BaTb ' Te cuBaTb ' 6 pu 3 r n 8 a'rb - aBmin ' KJm Rn BaTb
' n a x n nar b can BaTL ' gi a Bu BaT b ' cun a Tb
'
' - anmin cr n na r b
su gar },
' form 6 y ny qn from appe aring in Grou p II . 1 5 8 GROUP I I I .
INFINITIVE PRE SENT and FU TURE ITERATIVE 2n I per. d per. 43 I 37 KO JI O ITI: KO l I 28 MO JI O T L MCJI ' ‘ 28 [n ono r b ]
. A T E E N I P S G RUND II . PAST G RU D
O BmH
-€ BaTb GROUP I V . ,
IN FINITIVE PRE SE NT and FUTURE
sl . I per a per. * ' ' 29 BoeBaT L BOI‘O * ' ' 30 memen a r b mex y $ ' ' - 3 1 mueH os a Tb n meH y em1 > $ ' 32 CO BsTO BaTL cos s Ty * ' ' 33 y Tp eH eBa'rb y Tpemo
A . PRE TE RITE I . P ST GERUND II PAST GERUND
* 29 Boe $ I 30 meme “ 8 3 a $ 3 1 n men o * I 3 2 cons r o ” ' - >i¢ ' q aan . BaB b BaBmi 3 3 y T peH e
GR OUP V. CONTRACTE D
lN FlN lTlVE an d FUTURE
I n par. 2nd per. $5t 34 p BaTb
3 5 BBaTb $ 36 H paTb - y Jinn , $ 3 7 6 p aT b * I 38 coca TI:
1 6 0 GROUP V I . ELIDED
INFINITIVE PRE SE NT and FU TURE
e . 2n I st p r d pet. ' mum - y 45mx. ' cm H - y - CI I I b '
- - — K M y cmx> mm y 4 3111 5 MH y ' n s w - y
I . PAST GE RUND II .
- a
G RO U PV I I . VARIANT INFIN I
INFIN ITIVE PRE SE NT and FUTURE IMPE RATIVE
st e . n I p r 2 d per. BeCTH Beg ' Kn acr b - Tn x x an
n n ecr n n n er
qecr b qr ” r Y 6 111 1 : p acr n pacT TDHBTB rpms ’ n acr n nac ' ex pecr n cx peo
A T l PRETERITE I . P S GERUN D l PAST GE RUND
' ' B a Ben f n e m, a Be o Be nmn ' ' ' m n a m am , a , m a n o m a nmn
n n nen m n n r m mi e , a , e o n é n
‘ ' t t I CJI b , ma, w o agr mn ' ' ' c m poes , po a , poc o po e a ' bl ‘ r man a r u 3 11 0 r u s m n rp 3 b , p p p ' ‘ n cm n acm, n acna , n ac o n a n ' ' ex ém cn e6 Jxa cx eox o cx e d nm p , p , p p
4 49 50 1 5 a s a e In 7 , , , 5 , 2 , the accent is on the l st yll bl ROOT CONSONANT 1 6 1 PRESE NT PARTICIPLE GE RUND PASSIVE
PAS T PARTICIPLE ACTIVE PASSIVE
TIVE S AN D E LIDE D ROOTS PRE SENT PARTICIPLE GE RUND ACTIVE PASSIVE , Benn I ' - O MH fi Knaga ' un er a ' qTa ' pacr a ' r pn sn ' n acn ' cx peox
PAST PARTICIPLE 2 ITE RATIVE PASSIVE ' ' B e t”. Ba x a aTb BO H TB en , A ' ' m a nem. RJI a AH BaTb ' '
‘ “ 25m . q B b n Tm aT , a a r r,
n ner efls n ner ar b ' I pa c r am. r pmsen m r pnsar b '
n acem , n a caT b I ' cx e rc n > p e d em ., m, c p e 6 a
o o o o 0 I m r e ar ti l es am BH T Tb in co bin ation s with p p c ; for ex ple DO C a . 1 6 2
GROUP VII .
INFIN ITIVE PRES ENT and FUTURE IMPE RATIVE
I nt per. l ot] per. ' O TBe ps - y - emb - n Tp Tpemb Tp n ' cr p n r cpn ncemb cr p n r n
mr - y mmemb 111 m
TI CK n eqemb HE RB
‘ TOJI K TO JI I C II I I ) TO XICH
PRE TERITE I . PAST GERUND PAST GERUND
' ' ' ' TBe ' TBe an a O TBe BJI O 'rne n m O p 3 b , O p , D O ps 0 0 I I r s T 11 a T 11 0 r c mn ep , ep , ep p ' r ' r n m a er u 1 11 0 c n r mn c n L, c p , p r p
11 é r m men , mrn a , 110 0 m n ' n' n e1 1 0 n e x m me s , n em a , {1 n ' T KJI O 1 o 1 0 1 0 m , TO JI RJI a , O JI on m
GROUP VI I I .
IN FINITIVE PRE SE NT and FUTURE IMPE RATIVE
0 d r. I st per. 2 pe
3 5 6 3 5 6 1 1 11
' ' co x co xim - ' H y m enu , ' na x n a x n n ' E H Bfl H b
' ' Ta Ta n n ' fl y m e nu , . To T0 11 1]
1 m y m enu ) r n n
A E II . P PRETE RITE I . P ST G RUND AS
' 51 51 11 a 3 5 6 11 0 3 6 3 , 3 6 , ' '
m) 1 1 cox n m. co , co x a , y ' ' ' 1 1 n a x11 0 n x n n ax m, na x a, a y m. ' 2 11 ' n 11 a 11 551 1 0 3 s , B ,
' fl H JI a T a n o TSI Hy JI b , T y y n
1 ' T n 11 T n 11 0 1 011 T o n y 1 s , o y a , o y m
n r H 11 a ”1 r fly x , y , m
‘ Old R u ssian verb only .
1 6 4
SE COND
G R O U P I X .
IN FIN ITIVE PRE SE NT and
t! er. I p 2nd per.
I ' - 10 Ben u mb ' - 1 0 T e p lm mb
' “ Y Bn gumn s
' cann mb
' Be pr mms
' Bn cn mb
'
CTO H I II I :
' ne pacmm , ' CJIH II I HII I B
sp ams
6 11mm .
M‘I HII I B
I . PRETE RITE PAST GERUND II . PAST GE RUND 1 6 5
CO N J U GATION
” ” STE 3 1 1 5 , IN FIN ITIVE S
GE RUND PASSIVE
r H MH H
- H MH H
PAST PARTICIPLE PASSIVE
' ' ’ Be ' B l B , emam , Be JI H BaTb
' ' ' n n Te p eH S , Te pmsm . Te pII JI H BaTI : ' '
‘ Bn msm. Bn nms al b
' '
cn mem. cn mH BaTb
' Be pqem . BépTH BaTL
' Bs mn BaTL
' cr a n BaTb
' ne px a aT b
' '
cm x aTb , cm XH SaTb
' sn pa Tb
6 115 8 5 1 5
MHKTTI : 1 6 6
G R O U P X
INFIN ITIVE PRESE NT and FUTURE IMPERATIVE
I d per. 20 d per.
' - 10 11151 1 11 11 1 1:
, 1 0 11 10 6 n
' cy gmmb ' p T n mb
' cnn r n mb
' Bo sn m b
' H o cn mb
' y qmms
' - 1o Tan mb
- 10 1 1 0 11 0 121 1 11 1,
- 10 TMKI II b
y MCTHmL
A . PRETE RITE l . P ST GERUND ll
' 4 1 a
- BB'B m am
' - ~ HJI $ “ KBI: KBmfl
1 6 8
N N THE G R UP 143. OTES O O S
- - 111 1, m Verbs in aro , ae , if co pounded with particles ,
do not take an iterative .
- 51 1 0 m ew s m Verbs , , if co pounded with particle , do
not take an iterative .
' ' ' ' ' b q 10 o6 T L oo io as T S Note q , y ; y , y ; p y , p asy ro .
- - em1> Monosyllables in 51 0 , Is ; also polysyllables , bu t
withou t iterative .
' ‘ Bu l K HTB un s . b , D , p
' ‘ B 11 1 5 b s BHT , 11 , ll Hl , man .
' ' qn b q 1 0 Perfective n o T , n o i ro .
’ ' ' r 1 1 rnaro nar b , r11 a o 11 10 ; no iterative (Old R u ssian) .
' ’ 1 2 non eoa r b 11 0 11 66 11 1 0 - eM11 10 en a r b n , ; ; np , Impe '
e MJI emb m an ) np and all in , ' '
4 T a a Tb r ac R . 1 C p g , c pa ny (Old u ssian form)
' ' - n Ta Tb Bn r a T b All in qy , pres . , as To , c c . ' ' ' ' x b 1 6 pon r a r b , pommy ; c pemer a r , cxp ememy ; Tpen e ' ' T T b en a , Tp e my , etc .
' ' ' ' ' ' R b 1 n b a safl s H n sa TL s arb 1 7 asa r , 1 3 a T , m , , p s . ' ' ' ' 91 a a' b t S 1 8 n n ca Tb , 11 11 ca Tb , n o c r , 1 eca T .
' ' 1 9 nn r ar b an m n , m y . ' ' 20 Al m r s d a - n11 1c 1 ' b xa r b l in a , y ; my ; as a a , n c
' ' ' ' n 11 q b b ( a y , nna qem ; amy , n mem ) .
' ' ' ' ' ' max b 2 1 o ex a Tb e m n w r um a r m m . p , 6 p y ; n a b , n y ; , a y , etc ' 2 l - a b - a 1 ' b cm; 2 A l in T , 1 0 , afte r vowel s o11 e , 11 ' ' a Tb n ia T b q sr b , Bo , y r , etc . ' ' ' ' ' 23 s n as a r b 11 10 r as b b , 3 a ; c a r , cr ai c ; cu m a r , cm '
amBa ro , etc . 2 7 T hese are all which belong to this grou p .
I I 0 I 2 9 All i n - eBaTb - 1o10 H B b 11 10 b , ; A e a T , 11 10 ; c a T , I 10 1 10 10 , etc . NO T H G O T E S O N E R UPS . 1 6 9
' ' Al - eBa'r5 - ro - 10 10 H q a r 5 Hoq xo vic l in , y , ; o , y ; e
' ' 1 5 10 Ba , acy ' ' ' ' ' - 13 5 - - 11 1 5 n m 10 R os a T 5 In 0 ar , y 10 , y 10 : 3 1 1 0 135 , 3 y ; , xy ro .
- b - a In O BaT , yi o with the accent on the root syll ble ; ' ' a os a1 5 B ' B s T5 p ji , qy C r o a ; etc .
- eBaT5 - 1 0 - 10 10 In , y , , with the accent on the root
' ' ' syllable; Beneps qn nam ; here also y a ar 5 .
11 1 ar' 5 1 1 m5 n r' 5 m5 1 'r5 , 1 y , 11 >1ce ; T a , Tr y , q ; p1 ca , pmy ,
em5 pm (no iterative) .
B aT5 em5 ' 5 m5 ' 5 p , p , Bp ; mpar , mpy , 11cp e ; mna r , m m5 ay , mne . r o 6 aT5 6 m5 H 5 p , epy , 6 epe ; r aT , ron fo . I I H I I I r' 5 o o em5 r n m5 opa , py , p ; c on a u , cr o y , cTO H e .
' ' c11 5rr 5 nu B s em5 5 n B n B eun . , c y , cm ; 110 1 1 , m y , m
' ' ' ' cr aT 5 H 5 5 1 5 5 H 15 , cr a n y , cr a em , perfective ; 11 , 11 y , 11
m5 1 1 e , perfective . ' ' ' 133 51 1 5 5 5 m m 5 a T 5 i n n in , 0 3 y , Bosme ; n a , n p My , p
' ' Mem5 s u s 1 5 s mm 3 an M51 n 5 m ; a i , a y , , perfective co pounds .
51 1 1 5 5 H 1 11 1 5 5 1 1 1 5 , n Hy , 1 1 5111 ; mar , m y , 1 0 1 3 ; a , an y ,
‘ I HCII I B .
' ' 1 5 6 pe11y , 6 11 10 11y , 6 11 10 115 iterative . ' ' ‘ x acr 5 x a K a em5 a 1 5 n s n a en u s p , p gy , p g ; np c , p my , p gi ; ' 1 5 a m5 nac , n ny , nag e , perfective . ' ' ' H r 13 s r' n r ecr n , mec n , 1 1 1501 11 ; and the perfective oop c . ' ' 1 3 1 5 n 0 11 3 1 ‘ n Besr n , n o iterative; 1 15 , no iterative ; . ' ' a H ecTn , no iterative ; n p cr n . r pecr nz ’ ' ' s ' m5 as e scm cscr 5 n ca e . p p , perfective ; , c ii y , n ' ' ' n 1 ‘ 5 r 5 n cr e 1 5 epe , nepe , p o pe , perfectives . I I i 6 ti 5 r t1 5 n sm5 M0 1 1 5 11 eq 5 11 51 r m epe , c epe , p , , , y ; i perative ,
51 11 1 5 , the only imperative in I I I 1311 0 1 5 11 0 11 0 1 1 5 sq 5 Teq5 e n - , , c , , p m , nemn C 5 cn ) . NO T S O N TH E G R OU S 1 7 0 E P . I I I I I 1 5 6 5 1 5 11 5 n H 1 5 135 11 1 5 5 5 cu 1 5 1 1 0 5 5 1 5 y , y , y , y , y , etc . I I 0 x u 1 5 on e i m : 0 x 11 1 5 M5 5 1 5 11 y , and , t e verbs 11 y , y ,
1 5 5 y1 5 .
' ' 5 a x 5 1 5 x y , Apu u y1 5 . ' ' ' O n e m n 5 5 5 5 ti e verbs , p y 1 , 5 5 11 y 1 , rm y 1 5 . ' ' n e ~ m 5 5 H 5 5 O ti e verbs , 11 y1 , 1 po 11 y1 . ' ' 5 5 1 5 a y , 0 5 y 11 y 1 5 . ' ' 11 5 11 1 5 - C11 1 5 11 5 11 1 5 5 y , y , a , cu n a 1 (iteratives) .
' ' ' 6 0 11 51 5 C M0 1 3 1 5 - to m 5 ; p , cu o 1 p5 ;
' ' x 5 1 5 5 5 1 5 c op6 , c p5 1 11 15 1 , my Ms .
r5 5 5 £1 5 ' cme s 1 5 5 5 1 5 pn ; 0 6 11 , perfective .
' ' 11 1 5 1 5 1 15 1x 1 51 5 5 e , , cB5 c1 5 1 . ' 5 5 1 11 51 5 x a , my ,
' 0 5 1 5 s1 5 6 c , 6 0 10 1 .
' ' ' ' 11 e11ca 1 5 11 emy nemn m 5 ; 15 0 11 11 5 1 5 M0 1m 1 1 0 1 I , , , y , 5 5 11 1 5 etc .
' ' 7 4 5 5 3 11ca 1 5 a 1 5 5 5 5 1 5 1 1 5 11 1 5 1 11 1 1 5 , Apom , p a , 1 1 , 111 5 , etc .
4 1 5 1 5 - 5 1 5 - u 1 5 Polysyllables in , 11 , p .
- 5 1 5 - 5 5 1 5 — n 5 1 5 4 1 5 Polysyllables in 6 , , , 5 1 .
5 1 5 Poly syllables in 1 1 .
- 5 1 5 - 1 5 Polysyllables in 1 , c 5 1 . ' ' - 1 5 1 5 - n e1 5 1 5 5 1 5 Poly syllables in , my ; p , p0 1 5 ,
- 5 Polysyllables in 3 5 1 .
- 5 Polysyllables in C5 1 .
4 - l in 15 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 4 1 1 5 1 5 111 5 1 5 . Polysy lables , , ,
- 1 5 Polysyllables in 5 after vowels .
- 5 . Polysyllables in 5 1 , u naccented after vowels
- 11 1 5 3 11 5 1 5 4 1 1 5 1 5 . M onosyllables in 1 1 5 , ,
- M onosyllables in 11 5 c1 5 1 5 .
- Monosyllables in 1 m5 1 5 ca .
1 7 2 T H E V E R B
sn mi winter ' su mo n in winter ' m mepa Top 's emperor ' n cn o mm n ) ( 1 ) fulfill ' x a di egrpa teacher’ s chair ' m a ccu u n of class Ruaces class ' Rpa cx a paint (noun) ' x p o Ms en besides (g . ) ' n e . B w , (g ) JI Aa ice ' J mn a linden tree '
' nymo x s m i f eadow (d m . of ny r b ) n§ 1 0 summer n£1 0 M$ in summer ' MO KHy TL (59) get wet
0 6 21 1 1 , (9) trim
wall p aper ' omn TL (30 m m ) ani ate ( . ) ' oxn o window ' o ceH b f ( . ) au tumn ' o cen mo in au tu mn ' ox o TH o willing ly ' n e e n i n ad p g front ( j . ) ' ne pem, (mama ) in front of ' n e tuca stove
n eqb ( 5 7 ) bake ' n on n Ba T b ( l ) pou r (rain) nous floor ' n omsma r b cx ( 1 ) be located ' nop1 pe 1 1 , portrait ' n ocmsBa T b ( 1 ) ripen T H E V E R B 1 7 3
' n ocpezm in the midst of (zer o)
1 1 0 1 0 11 0 1 1 , ceiling
' n pn ou Ba 1 5 (l ) arrive
' n pn x aaa n ie command n poAEfla1 5 (2) place (in an apertu re)
' n p ox ozm1 5 (80) come through
' n y c1 0 n empty
' p a6 0 1 a1 5 (2) work
' pog n 1 e11 5 parent
' p oAH a kindred
5 f p om ( . ) rye
’ CBBT I: light
' ceme n cm o family
' ceM5 a f amily
' cx ame n x a bench
' cmsr z, snow
'
' cn bm m, o snow (dim . of cn s r s)
' c o Jm ne sun (neut . )
' C CTaBJI SI T b 1 O ( ) make u p , constitute
C TO flb table
' c1 0 51 1 5 (7 2) stand
1 ’ l - c1 J 5 . a y , (p ) chair
' c1 5 H a wall
' 1 a a 1 5 (1 4) th aw
' - y ron , (g . ) Jxa corner
' qe GH u n y of school (adj . )
‘ Y I CH H m, pu pil 1 7 4 T H E V E R B
Vocabu lary ( Cont )
teacher
hou se - keeping bloom closet cupboard
in closet (prep . )
Ex ercise 2 2
' ' P y CCKAa HI KO JI A
' ’
rm , m accx n oms a eTca 3 1 , 0 1 5 11 1 0 H a m 6 1 1 x o mu an . B1 ,
' ' ' ' 5 1 3 1 0 n Ko M n aTB cc1 1 1 0 11 1 , 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 11 qem p e e1 5 n u . 11 0 1 0
' i '
1 0 1 1 , u GBJI ei n 11 0 11 5 Bu x amem , meJn ro x x 1 B . p o pa c oro . ( 31 5 1 1 51 ' ' ' ’ s m cTBH x n o 0 6 1 1 1 51 ooo nv . B1 . a x, s nauu se p g g pn a oi ru . ' ' ’ ' ' B5 o x n a n pox o imm cnsm a B1 : mae pn o g am n Bux o ga n
' ' ' ' ' o n n e n n u m; a c n m g . H a pe g e c m c on Ko u n am Bncn n ' ' ' ' ' ‘ 1 1 ccx ar c a a mn e nop pe 5 P y o I o ygr p H pa r opa. B5 ogmo m ,
' ' ' ' ' ' — r n e qrca E T; r m mx q y ny cr on m , Apy o xr am, gum y e 6 rmx 1 . Be
' ' ' ' ' ' n 1 e 1 5 eM1 — m a ccn asx en o e me , a m, p go a . I I cp gm no u n am ' ’ ' ' m m en nx o 0 1 0 51 1 1 , cx ame m gu y q m . He p em, cx ame n x amn c1 0
' '
e n lm c1 0 m, 1 1 c1 , m qn 1 e1 m B1 5 m d gp a a gu y .
' C E M B SI
' ' ' ' '
n B M m , n ma 1 e 5 fl m y no a cm, ow o p io . O Te m, x ma1 5
' ' ’ ' m n a a e r ejm . K o s m mm , e 151 11 1 mon pogm p e y m 31 . 8 0 1 1 0 11
' ' ' x 1 3c1 1 1 M0 5 6 a 1 5 n cec u . C u n 5 st si 1151 11 . 3 0 p p p 6 pa n o ' ' ' ' ' TeJm n 151 11 Bm cn s cocm mm xo n ceM5 ro pomm . P oim 11 .
' ' ' '
' — eme n m a m, m BCBX b n aC 5 3 0 1 O r e nw ma na c c . O gu p 6 ae1 1 .
' ' ' ' ' M3 1 5 san n ma e1 cn x os n n c1 3 0 M5 . O 1 e n1 , E 1 421 1 5 o qen 5 n ac b
' ' ' '
m a n 5 11 1 0 0 11 141 , R Bcer a 1 11 16 6 91 1 1 , a n u n x m 1 a ice o e g ox o n o
' ' n cn on n si eim mm, n p n x as a n ia .
1 7 6
IN FINITIVE I I I I I Ga 1mm111 5 m ry 6 , 6m 1 1 , 6 5 1 8 91 Gam 1 5 a I 0 I ' 6m mM b 6m mTe m 1 1 , 5 m T , , y 6 c I I I I x oq x o qem5 x 0 a ' ' s XO TH y , e r 92 11 0 1 151 5 I I I I x 0 1 n M'L x 1 n 1 11 0 1 51 , 0 e , 1 1 : XO TH T?
t1 1 ‘1 1 11 111 5 1 1 1 11 y , , 1 1 , 93 11 1 11 1 5 I 11 1 t1 1 t 1 1 51 1 1 1141 , 111 1 e, 1 1 .
I mn mn 6 m5 mn o oy , e , en 94 11 1 11 6 111 1 5 I II B CM’B mn e1 e G , 6 , mn 6 y 1 1 ,
0 . I a eB n n eBe ' m y , p e , p 1 5 9 n 5 5 pe s 1 0 . 0 0 B ' pene mm, pe eTe, p eBy 1 5
I I I I CTC HHD CTO PKXHB 'C U D H CT% , , 96 e1 eH a 1 5 I I I CT Pfi mfl C flD H eTe T E O h . , C O QHK> I I I r m r o 11 1 1 11 1 5 1 0 11 11 o o , 1 1 , 97 r H a1 5 I I I
1 0 1m m , 1 0 H n 1 e. 1 0 1 1 51 1 1 ,
AST E PRETE RITE I . PAST GE RUN D II . P G RUN D
qTHB$
r u an 5 P H Q B$ PH 3 1HHB
* For meanings , cf 1 45 . I . E PARTIC IPLE l . GE RUND I G RUND PASSIVE
' XO TK Mu r/I
1 1 11 1 1 5 1 111
' p eBy min
' c1 e11 51 n1 i n
' ' r on a min r on n Mu n
PAST PARTICIPLE ITERATIVE PASSIVE
o 1 ‘ 1 1 1 8 BI I I I H m am, I OHSI Tb , ra 11 51133 1 5 1 7 8
INFINITIVE PRESENT
cnm n n m5 o , c , cu m 98 cna1 1 I n n n a c M1 , cn 1 e, m n I I I s ay 5 Aem5 15 Ae1 1 9 5 9 s x aT , 1 11 111 1 b e1 e 1 91 1 1 11 , g , 11
O .
, n n m5 m gy , ge , i en , 1 00 111111 11 H M’b 1 AG , nge e , n gy 1 1
' ' ' em5 6 e1 1 Gy giy , 6 y n , y 11 ' ' ' 6 eM1 6 1 6 1 1 y A , y 11e e , y 11y 1 01
W' ** 5 eCM , ecu , ec1 5 ** 1 5 eeMu , cy
1 11 5 c1 1 1 1 1 1 , 1 , 1 02 sc1 5 s 1 1 1 1 91 1mM1 , e , 11 1 1
was: AaM1 ” Aam ” Aacn ”a" 1 03 a1 5 f . 11 , . a a M1 1 m a n 1 e g a , Aagm e , nagy gi
E l . PRETERITE I . PAST G RUND l PAST GERUND
' cna1 5 cn aB1 cna a
' s x aa
11am,
N ot u sed in mod ern R u ssian .
e U sed in futu re s nse .
1 80 T H E V E R B
Voca bu lary
' ' a cn mmasx nocx a slate
6 0 11 5 11 0 1 1 ill person
' 6 1 1 c1 p1m (91 ) quick
6 1 311 1 1 5 run
1 0 11 0 311 1 1 111: hung ry
' r n c en b ) - p b (m . slate pencil ' r po Mx i n loud
11a1 5 ( 1 03) give
me parti clez in d eed
' soon orn qecx i n cam, Z oological Garden
, 11 111 11 ( 1 00) go
1 1 3 1 (an d) ou t of
' Kape Ta carriage
' 11 1 5 B eB1 , (g . ) J a lion
11 10 6 6 3 111 111 kind
M51 1 1 chalk
' H a go it is necessary ' i o x ono around (qer o )
' n aCTy x 1 shepherd
' n e p cn m, peach
' i 1 He m Petie (d m . of He1 p )
' n n ca 1 5 write
' 11 0 (qemy ) through
'
1 1 0 C1 e 11 5 (f . ) bed
' ’ n os x a1 5 (see a x a1 5 )
' n pin 1 111 (1 00) come z xmn f with pre particle n pn (u pi) = toward
' n poqe c1 5 read through ' pe ns 1 5 (95) roar ' cenqa c'b - me immediately
0 11 111 1 5 (6 9) sit T H E V E R B 1 8 1
Voca bu la ry (Cont )
' cx o po quickly
cna1 5 (98) sleep
' cn ox o n mm peacefu l
' cn pocn 1 5 (84) ask
' c1 a 110 flock
' ' c1 e 11 a 1 5 (96 ) g roan (u su ally c1 0 H a 1 5 ) TyAa thither ' a 1i5 1 5 see
' y n 1 n (1 00) g o away ' ywa 1 5 (84) teach
' t 5 51 4 a y 1 11 1 c (8 ) le rn (lit . teach oneself to a thing q y )
' x 0 1 5 1 5 (92) wish
5 CT5 (1 02) eat
' 5 x a1 5 (99) go in vehicle
' ' i 1 11 11 1 M o ma 5 5111 1 1 1 11 0 5 . 51 11 JI 11 6 y 1 6 5111 1 1 1 cx o po. $1 x o ' ' ' 1 11 1 1 H q q eg 131 151 5 0 Mon 6 a e x o e1 1 . 11 111 11 0 1 51 y 11 , p 0 1 1 y n 1 11 .
' ' ’ ' 1 1 H qm T n o SI 1 1 p0 1 1 y BaM po e ma nyn cm . SI c115 1 111 a11 1
' ' ' ' B5 11 1 11 eB1 B 0 0 11 0 1 11 51 ec11 0 M1 11 11 a11 1 pe 1 3 cagy . 0 1 Bcer na ' ' ' ' x q 5 150 11 5 11 1 1 pe ngu , Roma o e1 1 5C1 . 0 qe11 0 5 5 11 1 c1 0 1 1 e1 1 11 a
' ' ' 11 5 Hac1 x '5 1 0 11 11 1 1 enoe c1 a c1 0 111 51 noc1 e y 110 11 .
' ' ' n c1 K1 0 cu la1 1 ? SI cmno 11 Mo ce p51 1 a 11 111 e c11 51 1 1 . Cn n Te
' ' ' ’ ' 51 5 x a1m 11 a a5 1 0 Mo6 11 11 5 Kor a 51 a cn oxo n n o. M , gx M B c1 a ' ' ' ' ? Tam1 5 1 1 Mon e c1 5 1o 5 e1 1 e 0 1 1 1 ma Te . 115 11 1 1 . E TO 1 am1 11 1x 1 p ' ' ’ . 1 1 1 11 5 1 11 0 5 5 mom m 11 1 0 H omma n1 e 6 51c1 p5 e . 11 ne p , y
' ' ' ' ' - I/I am n on eMTe T cenqa c 5 1 ce . B 5 1 e 11 51 1 Kape 1 1 . 1 , A yna y 11 ' ' '
x 1 5 . M 5 M 1 0 11 10 6 63 11 51 M11 5 131 0 c asa 51 5 11 1 , xoma 11 6 11
' ’ ' — H e x q1 0 n 1 e? H e 5 m5 1 e Bcerna 51 0 opomo . E 51 5 gi
1 51 11 M51 BaM1 a 51 8 14 1 ; BaM1 3 0 6 0 5 0 . SI 5 1 11 51 6 1 0 11 0 . 11 A I ' I I I I I
M11 5 cc 3 11 1 e. 0 11 11 a m eM n e wu . 11 11 M1 11 11 11 ry . B51 11 11 A gy y pe 1 82 T H E V E R B
' ' ' ' He 1 51 n ame11 1 0 M 5 5 3 1 15 5 0 5 p 11 o 31 51 . Ma1 cn pocn na e1 0 ' ' 1 ' 1 1 1 1 1 5 5 1 11 1 H e 1 51 x t 0 0 1 5 5 1 1 5 1 15 6 1 5 . c asa 11 1 : 5 1 1 11 5 0 11 5 y m
' ' ' ' '
1 e11 5 C5 5 1 1 3 a x a t e on . 1 1 5 11 5 C5 s1 1 1 11 a c Me n 5 b gp q g xa xax 1 .
' ' ' ' ' 0 1 1 0 11 0 x a t e u c1 on 1 1 5 11 11 51 ocx a m b np a cc a A . H a a ccaon ' ' ' ' ' 0 cm; qe1 1 5 5 5 5 5 11 1 1 5 H 5 11 - 5 y y 1 M 11 0 M1 . a a cn 11 5o1 1 111 e gocx a m. I I I I I I 1 11 5 m 1 1 r 5 < e11 51 M5 . q5 1 e11 5 1 5 11 51 y p b Y y 1 1 . q a1r5 y qa1 c .
* Note that 5 5 1 5 u ses the root me11 = men . in the preterite .
1 45 . ALPHABETICAL LIST O F THE PARADIGMATIC RE G U LAR AN D IRREGU LAR VERBS *
' b e 7 6 5 e11 e 5 11 e a m 6 11 5 1 5 awake , p spe k , po pou sly , ' $ $ t 5 5 5 a1 5 33 6 epe 1 5 guard ,
' 5 mm 6 6 6 5 1 5 strike , 9 5 e11 5 1 co and , ' * ' 1 51 5 1 5 7 0 6 1 e 1 bleat , 22 5 ep1 5 tu rn , * ' 11 10 5 5 e 1 5 45 6 11 5 1 con sider , 45 c lead , * * 11 5 51 5 41 6 10 0 1 guard , 45 5 3 1 take , * 6 0 11 51 5 b e 6 5 5 5 1 5 68 ill , 6 5 see , ' * * o o 5 2 3 1 1 5 74 6 p 1 wrestle , 7 5 5 111 squeal , ' * ' 1 5 7 1 6 O 51 1 5 C51 fear , 72 B5 C5 hang , * 5 5 5 1 5 9 6 pa1 take , 3 7 twine , ' $ $ ex 1 5 2 1 5 11 eq5 5 7 6 p a yelp , drag ,
' 1 5 5 5 a 1 5 29 6 p5 shave , 6 0 e fight ,
' r 1 5 0 3 5 1 5 83 6 p51 3 a splash , 1 9 5 convey , * 51 5 6 511 5 o b e 1 01 5 0 11 6 drag , 57 t , ' ' * s1 5 m 2 6 511ca 1 5 run 91 5 on i 1 cla or , 2 , ' $ * 5 e 1 5 0 5 a1 5 36 3 convey , 5 p rave ,
* o - a m Th e nu mbers refer t the verbs in the Grou p Par dig s ,
1 42 Th e a m o § . asterisk indic tes verbs entioned in the notes t the Grou p - Paradigms
1 84 P ARA D IG M VER B S
ALPHABETICAL LIST (Cont )
i m 15 1 5 5 1 5 ma 90 KO Ba T b forg e ( n s ithy) , ke cottony , * ' 3 1 Mu x a 1 5 lock u p , $ 1 2 a , MHT L sh ke wash , 7 34 1 2 split , M5 5 1 5 m p easu re , 2
a 45 ste l , M5 1 5 ad 48 kn , , $ ' $ 74 H E C TH 5 shriek , bring , 1
' e 81 H 5 3 a 1 5 a 1 r volve , string pe rls , 7 * ' 7 H O C 5 1 5 4 cover , carry , 8 * ' ‘ * 34 q 1 5 3 tell lie , Ho a spend nig ht , 0 * * 7 3 5 5 1 5 7 lie down , ache , * 22 fondle , 0 6 5 5 1 5 6 9 1 in sult , * ' l 70 - f , 0 6 sc1 5 y p acqu ire , $ ' 5 5 * lie down , o6 1 5 4 y put on shoes , *7 ' * lick , ox H 1 5 64 y y dip , $ ' 6 5 $ stick to , o 1 5 38 pa bawl . * ' 59 stick to , opa 1 5 1 1 plou gh , * ' 9 pou r , O TBe 3 1 5 53 p open , * 7 9 1 5 love , nac 46 fall , ' adhere to , nac1 5 5 1 graze , ' *1 7 anoint , naxa 1 5 2 1 plough , * ' 2 1 brandish , n a x 5 1 5 6 1 y smell , ' $ 30 - su rvey , nepe 1 5 54 bolt , * 54 5 die , neq 5 7 I bake , *47 sweep , n e m c5 y occupy oneself , 5 * throw , 1 59 * ' $ a 6 0 1 8 f sten to , n 5 ca 1 5 write . * * 59 H L 9 wet , BT drin k ,
' 7 3 3k74 be silent , n 5 ma 1 5 squeak , ' * 28 20 g rind , n aa x a1 5 weep , * ' 55 ‘ 47 be able , IU I CCTH braid , 89 9 aveng e , I I JI U T B sail , 3 I a° 1 8 hu rry away , 7 7 [1 11 51 ca1 5 dance , P ARA D I G M VER B S 1 8
ALPHABETICAL LIST (Conn)
' * ’ $ 1 8 cx 5 5 5 a1 5 ofi 2 3 gird , 11 throw , * * 3 CKO 6£1 5 6 7 reg ale , 3 p g rieve ,
7 cx eme get rest , 8 p $ ' 1 6 * gnash , 50 1 a 1 5 crawl , ' * CK TH p CC scrape , 52 weed , 2 7 * * n £ 1 5 cx p5 squeak , 6 7 rip , 27 * - 5 cn a1 send , 24 lie , 1 0 cnu1 5 pass for some tread , 3 6 $ 2 thin g cau se dislike , 8 ' * CJI II I aTb 41 LI hear , 74 accept , $ C M 1 5 0 1 p5 look , 66 4 ' stretch , 5 * C Me s 1 5 pm stin k , 6 9 * - CH 1 5 spin , 62 y sleep , 6 5 * 5 1 spin , 46 c0 5 0 advise , * Ba1 5 hide , 55 * ' * ff 7o 1 5 pu , coca suck , 38
' 8 o 5 1 5 et 60 sing , c x y g d ry , 3k 32 1 5 8 rej oice , cna sleep , 9 * ' 53 c1 aBa 1 5 a unfu rl , st nd , 23 $ c1 a1 5 m pull off shoes , beco e , 40
' 49 c1 eH a 1 5 m grow , oan , 96
34 - CTna1 5 tear, spread , 2 5 ' * a 95 c1 0 1 1 a 1 5 ro r , moan , 38 $ ' 5 7 c1 0 5 1 5 speak , stand , 7 2 $ ' * 34 c1 a 5 neigh , pa 1 suffer 1 4 A , * ~ grumble , 1 6 c1 5 q5 55 p shear ,
cm 1 5 g row cool , 40 ' c 5 1 5 y11 j udg e , 80 * $ 7O csc1 5 whistle , sit , 53
c§ x 1 5 whistle , , sow , 22 ' san ctity , 82 1 a5 1 5 86 I conceal , 6 9 1 1 5 sit , epe ru b , 54 1 86 P AR AD I G M VERB S
ALPHABETICAL u sr (Cont )
6 7 * endu re , bloom , 47 1 8 cu t , hew , 78 value , $ * flow , 5 7 a 6 1 pine aw y , $34 * weave , wait , 22 $ * weave , 60 1 8 itch , 88 grow dark , read , 48
58 1 pound fine , read , 1 * 1 5 tread on , honou r , 93 64 sin k , drown , * feel , 32 peek 1 2 $ * m b ear 4 tre ble , 1 6 , * 3 2 1 touch , 6 hear , 94 pull , 6 3 err , m ake noi se , 6 7 33 breakfast , * sew , 9 86 teach , eat , 1 02 92 wish , go (not on foot) , 99
LE SSO N XXIV
THE VERBAL ASPEC TS AN D PASSIVE
As R l 46 . has already been indicated , the u ssian verb
has only two tenses , the present and the preterite , Indeed , the l atter is more of a participle than a ten se , as it doe s h not inflect for person . T e verb makes u p for this lack of tenses by the existence of what are known as aspects , regulating the expression of the continuance or n on - con tin u an ce of the verbal action . They are peculiar to all
n . the Sl avonic lang uages a d are fou r in n umber , viz , Per
1 88 VERB A L ASP E C T S
continually g oing) . There i s little u se in an elementary work in discu ssing the p r iri cipl es governing the composition of the m m for s of the aspects , which u st be learned by practice Th and u se of the dictionary . e student mu st consu lt the i “ su b ect . H . S m excellent work on this by W Lowe , yste ization ” 1 9 of the R u ssian Verb , Cambridge U niversity Press . 09.
re rti les m Verbal p pa c u su ally i ply a perfective sense , in addition to their ordinary directive meaning .
Th e examples and the exercise will show the exact
s i l force of a pect v a verbs .
1 4 R L ICLES 7 . THE VE BA PRE PART
= ‘ ’ 5 m . 5 5 5 0 5 5 1 5 3 p ri arily , direction u p ; viz , 3 0 11 (raise u p) ;
' ' 5 0 5 1 5 1 5 5 3 ece1 (enliven); 5 0 3 My5 ca 1 (attain age of pu berty) .
' ‘ ’ S m 5 0 3 6 11 r0 5 1 5 econdarily , it eans tu rning back , as a 11ap
(retu rn thanks) .
‘ ’ 5 51 = primari1y motion from within outwards and also
‘ ’ 5 1 5 completion , as (go ou t of any place); 5 11 6 5 1
'
(whiten) Bu n y c1 5 1 5 (let go free) . In perfective forms ,
' Bax- 5 5 takes the accent , as Bu py6 1 (cut down) , bu t not in ' m 5 5 11 51 1 5 i perfective forms , as py6 .
' ‘ ’ s x a1 5 110 indicates direction towards , as Ao (reach a m destination) . In only two verbs does it g ive the si ple
' perfective sense : xona 1 5 (end); 11 0 5 0 5 1 1 5 (make an end of);
’ ' C MH CJI HTb (understand) ; AO CMu cn5 1 5 (understand thoroughly) .
1 “ ’ 3 a: ( ) Locally denotes covering the obj ect by the action , ' ' s 5 5 a 3 a a sam e 1 (g lue over); 3 am e5 M5 1 5 (st amp , br nd) ;
' ‘ ma 5 5 1 5 e 2 Tem orall z retardin p (get cov red with ru st) . ( ) p y g
' ’ 3 aMs mxa1 5 or interru pting the obj ect by the action , as
( delay , retard) . VER B AL A SP E C T S 1 89
‘ ’ 5 51 m m 5 3 : (1 ) In , i . e . ove ent ou t of and ‘ ’ m completion . It gives the si ple perfective sen se to on e
‘ r o 6 5 1 5 verb; (catch) . Note that the verbs p (bend);
‘ ‘ ‘ B m 5 5 5 5 1 5 6 oqe 11 5 1 5 cs1 KO CH T ( ow , squint) ; p (bend ) ; (bend
‘ ’ oneself take 5 3 to denote motion sideways . (2) I t de ) ,
‘ ’ ‘ notes uninterru pted action along a su rface and also action
’ ’ cn 5 c 1 5 throu g h in all directions , as 5 a (cover a sheet
’ ‘ with w riting) ; 5 3 0 p>1ca 5 5 1 5 (cover with ru st) ; 5 3 0 6 p a 1 5 (tear
‘ to pieces) ; 5 3 3 5 6 H y1 5 (g et chilled throu g h) .
‘ ’ ‘ z : 5 5 a: (1 ) action onto a su rface , as H an 5 ca 1 5 a 6 y
‘ ‘ ‘ M a rs (write u pon paper); H a11 0 11m 1 5 6 y Ma ry ( pu t a gloss
‘ a 2 a a m b u pon p per) . ( ) ction onto a ce rt in a ount of o
‘ ‘ ‘ ’ H a 51 3 r a1 5 H acama 1 5 e e 5 5 5 a j ects , as 6 p (besprinkle) ; A p (pl nt
‘ ’ 5 H trees) ; Ha 1 0 5 0 p 5 1 (talk u p , retail , repeat) ; ax pn qa m. M5 6
1 0 (tire ou t by shrieking ) .
‘ ’ : 0 action around , as (denude , strip) ; oqep
‘ ‘ (bl acken all over) ; 0 1 5 ep115 1 5 (grow hard) ; 0 6 pa 110 5 a1 5
(rej oice thorou ghly)
0 6 ; 0 6 0 h ave the same force as o .
‘ ‘ ’ 0 1 : 1 a m m 5 ( ) Loc lly otion away fro , as 0 1 yc1 5 1 5 T m ‘ (let go away) . e porally completion of a continued
‘ ' ’ ’ T JI XCH T b m ' action , as O C y (serve one s ti e) ; 0 1 pa6 o 1 a1 5 (to ' 0 1 11 3 1 1 0 5 1 5 finish working ) ; pa 11 a (finish celebrating a festival) .
' ‘ ’ ‘ : 1 L ocall z motion n e B ne pe ( ) y across , as p eii a a 1 5 (hand
‘ ’ ‘ a n over) , and ction on all the obj ects in order ; epecco p5 1 5
‘ m n e e1 5 5 ca (quarrel together); also utuality , as p 0 0 p5 1 ( cbn fer) .
‘ ’ : a m Temporally p ssing of a period of ti e , as 5 epe 3 5
' ‘ i n e eH oq a 1 5 a M 0 5 a 1 5 (pass the w nter); p (p ss the night) .
”‘ O S . Old Slavonic . 1 90 VERB AL A SP EC T S
‘ no: (1 ) L ocally ; completion of an action on one or m ’ ore obj ects . [1 0 i s frequently u sed instead of other p re
a p rticles which indicate action on a single obj ect , in order
’ ‘ m c 6 5 1 5 e e5 0 to show action on any , as py gi p (fell a tree) ,
‘ ' ’ ‘ bu t n opy 6 5 1 5 Aepe 5 5 5 (fell trees); ne pe 5 0 sarn o x n o (the ’ tree i s choked u p) , bu t cyna (sin k vessels) . (2) T m ‘ e porally , denotes the continuation of the action of the
' ’ 5 5 1 5 verb for an indefinite period , as noc 11 ( sit for a while); ' n o a6 1 1 5 p o a (work for a little while) , etc .
n o z di re ti n m as 11 0 11 5 51 5 1 5 a n c o u p fro under , 11 (r ise) ;
‘ ‘
H O MCC TK n o e ma 1 5 . A (sweep u p) ; gg p (hold u p , su pport) It
1 5 a gives the simple perfective sense to three verbs ; m5 a (w it) ,
‘ ‘ 5 0 0 35 5 1 5 er 11 0 5 a1 5 a n o er n5 0 5 a1 5 as 11 11 ; p y 5 p ( dj u st) , g p y p ;
‘ ‘ M 1 5 D M CTH ec (sweep) , O A e .
‘ ’ l1 p5 : (1 ) denotes fulfillment of the action till t h e end
' ‘ ’ 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 m or till a desired su ccess i s reached , as np c 11 ( ake
‘ thoroughly ashamed) ; n p 5 py 5 5 1 5 (make thorou ghly tame) ;
’ ‘ u 5 6 5 1 5 a p (fasten to) . (2) Quantitatively it denotes ction
‘ ‘ ’ n 5 r 5 1 3 1 5 5 cs o s x n on all the obj ects withou t exception , as p p p
‘ ‘ (g naw all the n uts) ; n p 5 p 5 a 1 5 5 0 5 5 5 5 1 51 (pluck all the
‘ ‘ flowers); n p5 c1 p511 5 1 5 5 5 5 5 11 y (kill all the game)
‘ ’ n po: (1 ) denotes action throu g h in one direction and
‘ ‘ ' 5 also motion past an obj ect , as n pocym5 1 (dry thoroughly) ;
‘ ' 5 T m n p0 5 1 5 (g o past) ; p0 Mqa 1 5 (g allop past) . e porally
‘ ’ ‘ continu ation of the action to a defined end or for a
‘ ’ m n 0 1 0 5 0 5 1 5 sw5 m defined ti e , as p p p (orate [ ake] a speech); ’ ‘ ’ n poms 1 5 n s cmo (sing a song); n popafio 1 3 1 5 (work for some
‘ 5 time); n ponema 1 (lie for some time) .
’ ‘ ’ n 1 5 p as indicates the dividing of the action , as p aam
' 5 : (divide apportion) ; aar a6 5 1 (pillag e , plunder) an d al so , p p
1 92 VERB A L A SP E C TS
’ ‘ SI n ocwxa ro BaM'5 5 51 p53 5 y I am sending you a cu tting
' ‘ SI n ouu u o BaM5 5 5 C 5 Mo I sh all send you a letter
’ ‘ SI I I O CJI a JI ’b emy I sent h im this
‘ 51 n 5 my I am writing
‘ 51 H an 5 my I shall w rite
’ SI 5 5 ca 1 1 '5 I was writing
' 51 5 an5 ca 11 '5 I wrote (or have w ri tten)
‘ HTO 5 x o 11 5 1 '5 ? Who i s ente ring
0 5 5 5 0 5 1 311 5 H e entered
0 1 1 5 5 0 3 5 pa 111 a e1 cs1 5 a 15 11515 H e retu rn s eve ry day at six
I ’ e1 i 5 5 5 mec1 5 m 5 ir m 5 , o clock bu t yesterday he
I ’ n o q a om. 5 o p s5 pa retu rned at ten o clock .
I I I ' 1 5 .11 cs1 5 s1 1 5 5 11e c qac0 5 5 . I do not know at what
I I 0 H e 3 5 a m 5 5 5 0 1 0 p0 M'5 hou r he Wl ll retu rn to
qacy 5 0 3 5 p a1 5 1 cn day .
‘ SI CC I O AH .
’ I t i s absolutely incorrect to u se the futu re 6 y 11y ,
‘ em5 m 6 y 11 , with an infinitive of the Perfective for . One
’ ‘ ‘ ’ 5 cannot say 6 y 11y H an 5 ca 1 5 meaning I shall write , becau se
' i nfin 5 5 5 the . an ca 1 i s Perfective and its presen t tense is
‘ Th e itself a futu re , as ju st indicated in the examples . 6 y gy ,
’ n 6 y 11 e111 5 form may be u sed only with the i nfi . of the
’ ‘ ‘ m 5 5 1 5 m I perfective verb , as 6 y 11y n ca eaning I shall be
’ writing u nfinished action . This i s an invari able rule , bu t
one frequ ently violated not only by beginners , bu t often
by uneducated R u ssian s . Th e only w ay to learn to u se the
R u ssian verb i s to refer to verb - lists which g ive the aspects
and observe the above mentioned p rinciples . VERB A L AS'PE C T S 1 93
Th e One - Time - Verb is nearly always expressed by the
‘ - - 1 5 5 1 VIII grou p verbs ending in n y ; thu s , 1 0 c y5 5 1 5 5 5
5 k m - 11 5 ep (who i s nocking at the d oor) , fro the I g rou p
' ‘ c1 y 5 a 1 5 (to be knocking) . Th e answer would be : 5 c1 y 5 5 y 11 5
5 5 e 5 . e . . 5 11 p (I knocked at the door , i , once and ceased)
m Th e Iterative , or repeated action for , u su ally ends in
' ‘
- - 5 5 5 1 5 c1 0 5 1 5 . n om o 5 1 5 . 515 a1 , a , as p (constru ct); P p ; Iter
’ 1 5 5 o- c pa 5 a1 , with change of the vowels to a, which i s a
‘ ‘
c1 0 51 1 5 . 1 5 5 1 5 . common phenomenon ; cf . (stand); Iter c a a
- 5 - 5 These 515 a1 , 5 5 a1 forms mu st not be confu sed with the
- 0 5 a1 5 - e5 a1 5 m a , for s of Grou p IV , which are not Iter tive in force .
It will be evident from this and the preceding lesson s that the R u ssian verb mu st be studied , first from the point of view of form, i . e . , of conj ugation , which has to do m only with person , gender and nu ber; secondly , with regard
to tense , as indicated by the aspects herein described , and
thirdly , with respect to directive force , as indicated by the
i les a p repart c , mostly perfective , ne rly all which show d i r e c t i v e
m- m force in modifying the ste eaning .
THE PASSIVE AN D REFLEXIVE VERB
T 149. here i s , strictly speaking , no passive in R u ssian , its place being taken by the reflexive form of the v e rb , which i s made by su fii x i ng to the ordinary active forms the
- cs1 m n reflexive suffix after for s ending in a consonant , a d
’ - m 1 0 5 5 c5 after for s ending in a vowel ; thu s , 0 p 1 5 (he
‘ ‘ spe aks) bu t 1 0 5 0 5 1 cs1 (it speaks i t selfz it is said); n ocx a , p ‘ 11 5 (they sent) ; H O CJI a JI H C b (they sent th emsel v esz th ey were
- cs1 - C 5 a sent) . This , is , of cou rse , an bbreviation of the 1 94 P A S S I V E
‘ reflexive pronoun ce6 s1 . It should be n oted th at all ac t ive
a - 5 e forms which end in the h rd sig n , d rop thi s l tter before
- the reflexive cs1 . Observe the following conj u g ation of a passive reflexive v e rb
I 51 Ab naro C 5 I make my selfz I am made — I become
I 1 51 As naem5 cs1 thou b ecomest
I I I 0 0 11 5 m m 0 11 0 1 5 11 1 s1 i t m , , 1 , ae c he , she , beco e s I M5 1 manaeMca we become
B51 115 11 ae1 ec5 you become
I I I 11 5 11 5 11 a 1 cs1 m 0 , 0 5 11 10 they beco e
I I 1 E xamples : 51 H e 3 5 a m 1 1 0 m m . ms flaeTca (I do not know what i s being done [z h ap pen in g ] th ere) : 0 11 5 cm; ‘ z as Jxan ca n p 0 1be cc0 p 0 M5 (he became [ w made] professor) .
Note th at the imperative of this form of the verb also
’ - s1 - 5 5 1 n n i suffixe s the reflexive c , C , as c11 1 a c ( mp . sing . ) (make
z b m - 5 thy self e made) , in which for the i s a consonant and '
- cs1 c s nanr ects im . hence requires the ending , and n , pe r second
‘ - - 5 e . person plu ral , where the C i s su fii x ed to the pu re vowel
Th e passive relation may also be expressed by the u se
‘ 0 11 1 5 a11 5 of the passive participle , as 5 6 511 5 51 6 p (he was ’ ’ ’ 5 6 5 a1 5 5 11 6 33 1 5 Bcé me cr eH o elected) , from 51 p , perf . 1 ; y y po
' as (all is alre ady arranged); 0 1 1 5 6 511 1 5 y6 5 1 5 (he w killed) . I t will be observed that the s h o r t form of the passive T participle is the one u su ally employed in this sense . his constru ction i s precisely like the E ng lish .
T m 1 50. here are also any verbs which in Greek or
h a a . . Latin would be c lled deponents , i e verbs whic h ve a
1 96 P A S S I V E
Vocabu lary (Cont ) I I I - - 3 5 515 1 5 a 10 a em5 I . a p a ; , ( ) I I I cov e r ; k ee p off - - m5 3 a5 51 5 5 o 5 o e P . p 1 ; p 10 , p ( )
sapxca 5 5 5 11 5 5 ru sted I ~ 3 a 5 ca 5 5 1 5 5 10 5em 5 I . et p ; , ( ) g ru sty I Bau m1 a protection
I I l 5 cqe 3 1 1 1 5 ; - qe a1i - qe s 11 ell 1 5 ; y I y ,
5 cqe 3 5 P . pret . ( ) disappear I I o 5 - - m 5 cqe3 a 1 ; a 1 0 , a cu I 5 pec1 5 51 11 5 1 1 5 farmer ; count ryman I 5 y u e 11 5 merchant I I I 5 y 5 5 1 5 ; 5 y 11 11 10 5 y 1 1 5 1 11 5 b u y
an d (I . )
’ p I ‘ O M 'L around ; round abou t
‘ 1i a 5 5 a shop ; bench
11 1 91 1 5 bark
11 5 11 1 e11 1 1 515 deprived of (gen . )
JI H II I I ) only
‘ 11 0 11 Ma 11 5 pilot
' - m 11 q5 . a y , gen bea ; ray
11 1 1 11 0 1 1 forest (adj . )
115 0 5 forest (n . )
l a 11 5 1 5 ; gen . p . ye r
‘ Ma 11515 little
5 5 315 15 dear
’ 1 1 e 6 o heaven
' 11 ec11 0 cn 515 unbearable
0 6 a both (takes gen . sing . like 118 8 )
A rare in stance . P A S S I V E 1 9 7
I 0 11 11 a 15 1151 onc e; som e tim e ag o I 0 5 51 1 5 ag ain I I - 1 - 5 11 1 5 P . 0 1 5 5 1 5 1 5 ; 1 y , 5 1 5 ( ) I I I answ er ‘ - - e111 5 O TBBI a T b ; a ro , a ( L )
l 11 11 5 11 e1 1 5 (m) ; p . stump unyr5 plou g h
I ’ 5 0 5 5 p 5 1 5 (see 5 s p 5 1 5 ) I I I 5 1 0 C5 11 0 5 0 1 1 0 5 p51 1 5 C51 ; 11 0 p 0 , p
em5 cs1 (P . ) I I I cover; v eil 5 51 - a 1 0 C 5 - a cu m 5 0 5 p515 a 1 c ; , C51 ( L ) I I I 1 5 - a ro - a e11 1 5 I 5 0 11 5 Ma ; , ( ) I I 1 1 0 1 1 51 1 5 ; 5 0 5 My 5 0 5 Me 11 1 5 (P . ) I I I 5 - - ei t1 5 11 0 1 e111 1 1 5 1 ; 5 1 0 , s (L)
r I I n p5 x 0 11 5 1 5 ; - xo>5 y - x o 115 1 11 5 (I ) come to; arrive I I n 1 5 1 5 n 5 z1 11 5 em 5 P . p ; p , ,y , p 11 ( ) I I I 0 5 11 51 1 5 C51 - 51 1 O C 5 - 51 m m roH about ; knock np a ; , C51 ( L ) about n 0 a5 a 1 5 ; am - ae1 11 5 (L) p 5 I qiI , 11 I - - n o a 1 5 a M5 a 111 5 P . p li ; 11 , 11 ( ) I I I n ponexca 1 5 ; - 11 e55 y - 11 e>5 5 11 1 5 (I ) I I I n on cx a 1 5 - 5 a 1 0 - 5 a m m L p y ; , ( ) I I I l et n pon y c1 5 1 5 ; - 11 y 11 1 y - 11 y c1 5 11 1 5 throu g h P ( . ) I I 11 1 5 1 5 - 5 a 10 - 5 a em5 L p0 e a ; , ( ) flow throu g h ( along ) 1 - 1 - 51 e1 11 5 P n p0 1 e 1 5 ; 1 e 1 y 1 e ( . ) I I pa6 o 1 a; 5 5 pa6 0 1 s work at work 1 98 P A S S I V E
Voca bu l ary ( Cont ) I I I p acn ax a 1 5 ; - 11 a11 1 y - 11 a mem5 plou gh (P )
’ 1 pma 5 1 5 1 1 a ru st ( n . )
‘ ’ ’ 5 1 1 5 s n q em 5 L p 0 3 ; pou y , p o ( ) g rumble
' py qe n brook
‘ ‘ 5i 1 5 m5 L p ; p o 1o , po e ( )
’
5 51 p511 5 (P . )
‘ CBs min fresh
‘ CBB TJI LI PI bright ; brilliant I I I
- - 0 .11 a1 5 s1 a10 c5 aem5 c51 m 115 c ; , beco e I cepe6po sflver I
cny5 5 T5 C51 (P . ) I happen cn yqa 1 5 ca ( L ) I co nfi ne
I I I cn pO C5 1 5 ; cn pomy cupo c5 m5 (P ) I cn pa m5 5 a1 5 ; - a1 o - aem5 (I) I c1 a1 5 1 1 1 0 1 a 11 e11 1 5 ; c a y , I I 5 l c1 py ; p . c1 py 5 I 1 o5 a p5 11 1 5 I 5 - a 1 py11 ; gen .
1 5 11 5 (f. ) I y M11 51 11 I I I - 10 5 x pa11 1 1 1 5 ; 11 x p a1 1 5 1 11 (P . ) I I I protect 11 11 - - 51 m5 x p 51 1 5 51 10 , e (I)
X) vvorse I t1 a ma grove
‘ qe e3 5 1 0 = p ( 1 1 ) in te . oral (looking to futu re)
I 51 (211 5111 clear
2 00 LES SO N XXV
T H E P R E P O S I T I O N S
I Th e following are the chief R u ssian preposition s arranged according to the cases which they govern .
G E N l T l V E
‘ 5 po M5 except ’ M e 15 11y between (rare) ‘ 3 M5 Mo past by
6 5 0 11 0 around , about 0 1 5 from; aw ay from 11 6 1111 5 alongside of
‘ 11 0 3 a11 5 behind ’ no c11 5 after
’ n ocpe5 5 in the midst of ‘ n po 1 5 5 5 ‘ against n p0 1 5 5 y I C5 from u pon
y at; at the hou se of
’ a 5 0 5 p e5 5 ag inst through , according to 5 5 , 5 0 to A C C U S A T I V E 4 5 5 0 5 5 , into (directive) no u p to , until 2 2 3 3 for (in exch ang e) 11 0 11 5 u n der (di recti v e)
‘ 5 Me mAy between u po concerning ’ 3 5 B 5 M5 Mo past , by C O 3 through
5 11 a onto (directive) C5 approximately
‘ 2 1 1 a115 ove r (directive) 11 e pe3 5 through
5 0 0 , 6 5 against
l C ova no cmifim m five nnd imm h l
2 G om u oca notin md imtmmm ul
3 C om m ifim occuu b ve an d pteposifion al 4 G ow ns dntim accun tive and pn posifiooal 5 Governo accun tive and pu pooitiou l P R E P O S I T I O N S 2 0 1
R U M
over
P R E P O S I T I O N A L
5 5 6 5 a 5 5 5 0 o , 0 bou t , in
’ 3 MK MO past by 4 11 0 after
5 1i r1 5 a on , at p at
’ ‘ Th e 5 5 Me m E O 0 6 5 ii 11 3 5 preposition s , gy , M M , o , , a , 11 , ‘ 5 0 5 0 5 e5 5 0 3 5 1 1 3 5 , 11 , , e pe with the accu sative are pu rely
directive in force . Th e prepositions memory with the genitive ' m 3 a um 1 1 a 5 5 and instru ental , with the instr ental , 11 , ne pe11 , ' n e 5 1 1 m 5 5 5 0 M5 M 11 p 11 , 0 115 with the instru ental , , , 0 a115 , 0 6 5 ,
5 5 e no, p , with the pr positional are pu rely locative . In other
words , the accu s . i s the d i r e c t i v e case and the instrumental
and prepositional cases are , i n general , l oc a t i v e in force
position in a place .
Prepositional u sage can best be learned by practice in
speaking and reading .
Th e above table i s sufficient to enable the student to
comprehend the g eneral scheme of this most difficult p art of
speech , which will be still fu rther illu strated in the following
exercise .
Voca bu lary
’ A u rnisr E ngland on onto ‘ 6 a3 a p5 bazaar for
6 11 1 53 5 0 0 1 5 near (g en . ) in a ' 6 o 5 11 5 a a r p c threw l ngu g e (p . ) 2 0 2 P R E P O S I T I O N S
Voca bu lary (Con t )
i1 a outside of (gen . ) m. over (inst . )
’ 1 1 1 beside (gen . ) 5 M e 15 Ge rman
war 0 abou t (p r .)
’
east ne pe115 before (inst . ) ‘
in to , into n n ma food (3 0 0 ) 11 0 115 under (in st . ) ’ elected n o q' ra post
‘ 1“ she went 0 n ox o me 11 a li ke someone ‘ Germany 5 0 1 0
’ dentist n os x a1 1 5 he went
‘ tree 5 0 5 x a1 5 to g o
for (gen . ) u po abou t (acc . )
'
behind (inst . ) n p0 1 5 5 5 ag ain st (gen . )
‘ to - morrow n pomfla she passed
‘ postpone 11 1 5 11 a bird ‘ west p51 11 0 5 5 market
‘ out of ce 1 1 a 1 0 p5 sen ator ‘ from u nder c1 0 5 1 5 stands
‘ cemetery c1 0 5 1 5 costs
except 05 from
- c0 be to (dat . ) lies fore c and con sonan t person north between (inst . ) stru ck past (gen . ) fell meeting
chu rch (f.) bridg e sou th
Ex ercise 2 5 I I I I
B o 6 e3 5 5 0 51 H r 0 11 5 3 5 0 0 1 5 Ba mer o . e1i p 11 . a m. 11 51 5 6 I I I I I I I I 3 1 0 6 51 11 0 5 11 5 0 m 11 ’ 5 C H SI 3 1 0 11 51 11 a. O a C HAB T b 5 0 3 11 M . 11
2 0 4 S Y N T A X
' a T a h im 91 o (I have lready given this) , but never 11am, ' ' ' em a To ac . Th e a a e y y e d tive should precede the ccu s ativ . m Fu rthermore , adverbs of ti e , u sually , bu t not nec e ss arily ,
a a s precede the verb , especially in su bordin te cl u ses , a 51 r o
' ' ‘ ‘ - B a n , C b mam . CCI O H SI (I w as a g t h im d a op A spe kin wi h to y ) ,
' '
' ' cx a a fl s q ro om > cero m n n em a bu t om. a , m p n (he s id th at
- m . he w as coming [lit . will co e] to day)
Th e th am s I S3. sequence of tenses i s not quite e s e a
ma m mm i in E nglish , as y be observed fro the i ediately preced ng
example . Th e indirect oration phrase pointing to the fu tu re is generally placed in the direct futu re an d not in the su bj unctive ;
' ' ' ' ’ ‘ H x a na ‘I I O Bee Boamo xcu oe c s naer ' thu s , oaa M s c aa , m s (she told me she would do [lit . will do] everything possible) . ' ' Th e conditional relation is expressed as follows : e u m 51 ero
' ' ' ' em TO a'ro Bu MHB cx asa Jm I H anay , cxaxcy y (if shall see i T I h m me . h im, will tell what you told ) his i s the simple
futu re conditional . Th e past conditional i s expressed alw ays by mean s of the particle in both protasis and apod asi s ; I fl amer s e cn n s: er o H ameM - ou m e cua SI ero , or , 51 e y
' - him im cx aaa n b Gu (if I had found , I shou ld tell h , or should
r I l
e 1m a u ms H a me have told h 1 m) , etc . ; c G Ba m . MBCTB SI
' am a's I a a Toro H e m (if were [or had been ] in you r pl ce , ‘
I should not do that , or should not have done
- Jm 1 54, In asking questions , the interrogative is su f
fixed to the word u pon which stress i s to be l aid an d this
' n is u su ally g iven the first place in the phrase , as men fi m
' ' ' 1321 }; s orm (did they see me) ; 0 11 6 - 11 3 BH ABJI H me an (was it
me a they who saw ) , where s the straig ht question is expressed
' ' ' - m x Jm ou n en me . Ba ms (did they see ) , etc If the particle
- a m .m is not u sed , the question is sked erely by the direct
' ' ' phrase in an interrogative tone : on a Bn mmn me n n ? S Y N T A X 2 0 5
Th e m a 1 55 , tendency is to express the prono in l subj ect
a ma m with the verb , especi lly in w riting , bu t this y be o itted ,
' as ( a ) H e 3 H a 10 (I do not know) , unless there i s some dou bt
' ' o n as to the actual su bj ect . as m, (or o a ) H e s fla en . (he
Th e ron ommal [she] does not know) . p su bj ect i s always m omitted , where a repetition of the pronoun would be eces
' ' ' ‘ m . afla em I TO a n n o em sary , 0 cero gm p y g (he knows that
- he will arrive to day) .
Th e m j I 56 . predicate u st agree with its su b ect in
' ' m Ico mx a ma x aer' 's person , gender and nu ber , as y (the cat
’ ' x o mx n mn x aror' 's is mewing) , but y (the cats are mewing) . m With nu erals , followed by a partitive g enitive , the verb i s
a either in the neu ter sing ular , if the numer l follows the
m a predicate , or , in the plu ral , if the nu er l precedes the
' ’ ' '
n n n m n a n , s B mem n a n , s B me n n m verb , as p o A y , or A y m p an
(five girls have come) .
Th e I 5 7 , plu ral of excellence is frequently u sed of
' ' r u cox n eocs n n r a dig nitaries , as E o B o p me c o 6 5131 11 Tam , (H i s A Grace [the rchbishop] was there) , and also by servants ’ ' ma n 31 111 in speaking of their sters , as 6 a p m . 6 51 no ma (the m aster was at home) etc .
Th e a m 1 58, predic te noun i s u sed in the instru ental , whenever a condition i s described which is not necessarily
'
m 51 n o e cco om . per anent , as p é p (I was professor) , but the predicate adj ective withou t a nou n is generally u sed in
, '
‘ a m : R 3 6mm, MO JI O L 51 the short predic te for oma A , '
z m> 0 3mm . I as I a A 6 ( w s . o t e when young , w very ill) fter
' the infinitive vero , the predicate adj ective withou t the noun
'
' m l m saceJI a eM x> wn s 6 0 is a l w a y s in the instru enta , as o
' r M a m H (we wish to be rich) . 2 0 6 S Y N T A X
a a am a l 59. When two dj ectives qu lify the s e plu r l
su bstantive , the adj ectives mu st each be in the sing ular ,
' ' , as an rni n cx in a (bp au ny scx i n 51 3 m m (the E ng lish and French
l anguages) .
l oo. In negative phrases of a partitive character , the
preterite or fu tu re is u sually in the neu ter singular , irres
' e i e sr 11 1 0 p ct v e of the number of the su bj ect; thu s , m n R e 6
' , ' TaM'b (I was not there) ; a Tn x 'b 11 10 110171 li e Aoma (these
' ' ' people were not at home) ; n omage n y H ero H e or
' ' ' H e 11 0 11 1 a11e n y H ero (he had no horses) ; Apyae n 11 e
' e ' 6 y 11 r 1, y Bacs (you will have no friends) .
a I 6 ] , In narr tion , the verb frequently precedes the
'
Bn a man : B C 1 1 5 m m . su bj ect , as m O (the other saw in a drea )
When the pronominal su bj ect is expressed , the entire su bj ect of the verb may intervene between the verb and the su bj ect .
a 51 In such cases , the verb comes l st in the sentence , as B1 :
' ' ' '
Bo 1 na fem . a Ty npy meq Bcs T n c1 e3 u co6 pa. (I [ ] have
collected in this pitcher all thy tears) . In secondary or
' '
6 6 w 1s ma dependent clau ses , the auxiliary y 11y , y 11e y follow m m the infinitive as in Ger an , bu t this is not i perative , as
u I I o e e u na x ar b 6 em1> 1 f W1 11 m e cna m m y 11 ( you weep ore) .
In short , the R u ssian construction is ve ry free and
depends very largely on the emphasis desired by the speaker . T here are no hard and fast rules of inversion , etc . , as in
German . If the student will remember that the e mp h a si z e d
i d e a takes precedence in the phrase , he will be following the
only real rule of R u ssian sentence formation .
2 0 8 S Y N T A X
' ' ' 1 H a T e r b ro 1 1 0 1 1 , man , cn 11 a. PI Bn sna m r s BO cm p y y m a ,
' ' ' ' ' 6 y 11r 0 A H u oqxa Bom a m. H en 11 B1 1 pyms ge pmm
' ' ’ ' ' q / ' sr p xceq . r o m , A mroqx a? II SaB M b y Te6 p meqxa?
' ’ ' , ' $1 ‘ a x M q BC TE OH 0 A B b r y py meq , ma o xa, B 11 53 11 co6 pax a .
' ’ ' ' '
b eqx a Be x 11 11 H 1111 11 1s me Bn gmm , x py m p o m . no a . e a 6 0 .
' ' ' H B n x r' b 6 em' 11 1 1 1 11 E cnn m emg no M u a a y 11 b , TO 11 31 c11 53 u
' ' ' ' qe ea'b x n 1i a ae w u o ma “ a T M11 15 1t a T m' cn r s p pa ny , orna o b I I I I n T 13 x m ny p o 6 y 11en . M11 15 ene p opo o Tam) . I I I I M m, 0 1 , me 11 e r1 11 a R n a (28 0 6 a 0 a cm m e nope 6 11 a no 11 m .
I I I I 1 1 1 qTo en x m i1 a T oM ’b cna r s O a pa 11a 6 1.i1 a , opo o . BIB LIOGRAPH Y
Th e followin g g rammatical works are accessible to Ame rican s t udents of R u ssian
O m R a d . E fii n h am D . A R S B ND , i plified u ssi n Metho London , g 1 Wilson , 1 9 5 .
O RB amma N E VI L L F E S , R u ssian Gr r . Oxford , Clarendon Press ,
1 91 6 .
O RBE T N E VI L L F S , First , Second , and hird R u ssi an Books . O 1 91 5 1 1 6 1 1 9 9 7 . xford , Clarendon Press . ; ;
R Kon v er sati n s - mm H P AUL FU CH S , u ssische o Gra atik . eidelberg , 1 1 Juliu s Gros and C 0 . , 9 0 .
’ H O SSF E L D S New Practical M ethod for le arning the R u ssian
a a S . R a . a L ng u g e by ppoport Phil delphia , Pete r
R eilly .
E a e a E a K ST E P H E N . TT R . J L , u ssi n V rbs M de sy London , eg an
T T rub n er an d C o . . Y Paul , rench , Ltd , New ork ,
E . an d O . . P Dutton C
mi R a WE e a . am . H S C W . LO , yst z tion of the u ssi n Verbs
e 1 909. bridg e U niversity Pr ss ,